STAFFORD SKILLED NURSING FACILITY PROCUREMENT AND...

STAFFORD SKILLED NURSING FACILITYCommission Number 2727

JONES & JONES ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS PC 00 0110-1

SECTION 00 0110TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

A. 00 0110 - Table of ContentsB. 00 2113 - Instructions to BiddersC. 00 5000 - Contracting Forms and SupplementsD. 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions

SPECIFICATIONS2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. 01 1000 - SummaryB. 01 2500 - Substitution ProceduresC. 01 3000 - Administrative RequirementsD. 01 4000 - Quality RequirementsE. 01 4100 - Regulatory RequirementsF. 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and ControlsG. 01 5100 - Temporary UtilitiesH. 01 6000 - Product RequirementsI. 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content RestrictionsJ. 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements

2.02 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE A. 03 0516 - Underslab Vapor BarrierB. 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and AccessoriesC. 03 2000 - Concrete ReinforcingD. 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

2.03 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY A. 04 0100 - Maintenance of MasonryB. 04 0511 - Masonry Mortaring and GroutingC. 04 2000 - Unit Masonry

2.04 DIVISION 05 -- METALS A. 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing

2.05 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES A. 06 1000 - Rough CarpentryB. 06 1753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood TrussesC. 06 2000 - Finish CarpentryD. 06 4100 - Architectural Wood CaseworkE. 06 6100 - Cast Polymer FabricationsF. 06 8316 - Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling

2.06 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A. 07 0553 - Fire and Smoke Assembly IdentificationB. 07 2100 - Thermal InsulationC. 07 2126 - Blown Insulation



D. 07 2500 - Weather BarriersE. 07 3113 - Asphalt ShinglesF. 07 5300 - Elastomeric Membrane RoofingG. 07 5423 - Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing (TPO) - FirestoneH. 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and TrimI. 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and DownspoutsJ. 07 7200 - Roof AccessoriesK. 07 8400 - FirestoppingL. 07 9200 - Joint Sealants

2.07 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS A. 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and FramesB. 08 1416 - Flush Wood DoorsC. 08 3100 - Access Doors and PanelsD. 08 3313 - Coiling Counter DoorsE. 08 4229 - Automatic EntrancesF. 08 5113 - Aluminum WindowsG. 08 7100 - Door HardwareH. 08 8000 - Glazing

2.08 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES A. 09 2116 - Gypsum Board AssembliesB. 09 3000 - TilingC. 09 5100 - Acoustical CeilingsD. 09 6500 - Resilient FlooringE. 09 9000 - Painting and Coating

2.09 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES A. 10 2601 - Wall and Corner GuardsB. 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry AccessoriesC. 10 4400 - Fire Protection SpecialtiesD. 10 5723 - Closet and Utility Shelving

2.10 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS A. 12 3600 - Countertops

2.11 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION A. 21 0500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression

2.12 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING A. 22 1005 - Plumbing PipingB. 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties

2.13 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) A. 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC EquipmentB. 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and EquipmentC. 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVACD. 23 0713 - Duct Insulation



E. 23 2300 - Refrigerant PipingF. 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and CasingsG. 23 3300 - Air Duct AccessoriesH. 23 3416 - Centrifugal HVAC FansI. 23 3423 - HVAC Power VentilatorsJ. 23 3700 - Air Outlets and InletsK. 23 8101 - Terminal Heat Transfer UnitsL. 23 8113 - Packaged Terminal Air-ConditionersM. 23 8126.13 - Small-Capacity Split-System Air Conditioners

2.14 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL A. 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and CablesB. 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical SystemsC. 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical SystemsD. 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical SystemsE. 26 0533.23 - Surface Raceways for Electrical SystemsF. 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical SystemsG. 26 0583 - Wiring ConnectionsH. 26 0916 - Electric Controls and RelaysI. 26 0918 - Remote Control Switching DevicesJ. 26 0919 - Enclosed ContactorsK. 26 0923 - Lighting Control DevicesL. 26 2200 - Low-Voltage TransformersM. 26 2413 - SwitchboardsN. 26 2416 - PanelboardsO. 26 2713 - Electricity MeteringP. 26 2726 - Wiring DevicesQ. 26 2816.13 - Enclosed Circuit BreakersR. 26 2913 - Enclosed ControllersS. 26 3213 - Engine GeneratorsT. 26 3600 - Transfer SwitchesU. 26 5100 - Interior LightingV. 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting

2.15 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS A. 27 5121 - Biophilic Audio-Visual Environmental SystemsB. 27 5223 - Nurse Call/Code Blue Systems

2.16 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 2.17 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK

A. 31 3116 - Termite ControlGEOTECHNICAL REPORT BY ECS MID-ATLANTIC DATED JANUARY 16, 2018

END OF SECTION



SECTION 00 2113INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

INVITATION1.01 BID SUBMISSION

A. Bids signed and under seal, executed, and dated will be received at the office of the Architectelectronicly before 2:00 p.m. local standard time on the 27th day of June 2019.

B. Submit bids to the following: Richard Jones, [email protected]; and AuburyHolmes, [email protected].

1.02 WORK IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTSA. Work of this proposed Contract comprises building construction and site development, including

general construction Work.1.03 CONTRACT TIME

A. Identify Contract Time in the Bid Form. The completion date in the Agreement shall be theContract Time added to the commencement date.

BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS2.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions to Bidders, Bid FormSupplements To Bid Forms and Appendices identified.

2.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATIONA. The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 2727, as prepared by Architect who

is located at 6120 Peters Creek Road, Roanoke VA 24019 dated May 31, 2019, and Civildrawings by Bowman Consulting dated April 09, 2019, with contents as identified in the ProjectManual.

2.03 AVAILABILITYA. Bid documents may be obtained electronically on web boxsite as indicated in the invitation to

bid.2.04 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA

A. Direct questions to Richard Jones, email: [email protected] and JamesO'Donoghue, email: [email protected]. Copy Aubury Holmes, [email protected].

B. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of ContractDocuments. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount.

C. Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 7 days before date set forreceipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum, a copy of which will be forwardedto known recipients .

SITE ASSESSMENT3.01 SITE EXAMINATION

A. Examine the project site before submitting a bid.BID SUBMISSION4.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE

A. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and timeprescribed.

B. Bids may be submitted in electronic form (email) to Richard Jones [email protected]; and Aubrey Holmes at [email protected].

C. Submit bid breakdown by division along with bid sheet.



BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS5.01 PERMIT FEES

A. Contractor shall include all permit fees in the bid.5.02 ALLOWANCES

A. Include the following allowances in the bid price:1. Site construction web camera $8,000.00.2. Landscape Irrigation $40,000.3. Security and Access Control Sysytem $70,0004. Park Benches $5,000

5.03 BID ALTERNATESA. Include in your bid Add Alternate pricing for the following:

1. Pay and Performance Bond.2. Reduce the scope of work as indicated by sheets ALT-1 thru ALT-3.

5.04 BID FORM REQUIREMENTSA. Complete all requested information in the Bid Form and Appendices.

5.05 ADDITIONAL BID INFORMATIONA. The awarded contract will include Liquidated Damages as follows:

1. Fee per Day, 1-30 days- $2005.00 per day2. Fee per Day, 30+ days- $3937.00 per day.

OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION6.01 DURATION OF OFFER

A. Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of Ninety (90) daysafter the bid closing date.

6.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFERA. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 00 5000CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING A VALID LICENSE TO USE ALL

COPYRIGHTED DOCUMENTS SPECIFIED BUT NOT INCLUDED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL.1.02 AGREEMENT AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

A. The Agreement form is AIA A101.B. The General Conditions AIA A201.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AIA A101 - Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of

Payment is a Stipulated Sum; 2007.END OF SECTION



SECTION 00 7300SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the General Conditions A201 andother provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. Provisions that are not soamended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.

B. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions that are defined in the General Conditionshave the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions.

1.02 MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONSA. Where conflict exists between parts of the contract documents, or between contract documents

and applicable standards, codes, or ordinances, The more stringent and higher quality shallapply. Large scale drawings shall take precedence over small scale except where items havebeen omitted from the larger scale drawings and are reasonably indicated elsewhere. Suchomitted items shall be assumed included in the larger scale drawings. Figured dimensions ondrawings shall take precedence over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over graphicrepresentations.

B. For brevity certain phrases in the contract documents are understood: Unless specifically statedas an obligation of the owner, it is understood to be an obligation of the contractor. Where arequirement of the contract is expressed in an indicative mood, beginning with "The Contractorshall" as the preceding phrase, "The Owner and Contractor agree that",is understood. Where arequirement of the contract is expressed in the imperative mood, beginning with words such as"construct", "fabricate", etc., the preceding phrase "The Owner and Contractor agree that theContractor shall" is understood. Where phrases such as : "as selected", "as directed", or "asapproved" are used, The following phrase "by the Owner". or "by the Architect acting for theOwner" is understood. Where ohrases such as "or equal" or "approved equal" are used, Thefollowing phrase " as determined by the Owner" or "the Architect acting for the owner", isunderstood.

1.03 AS BUILT DRAWINGSA. The Contractor shall keep an accurate record of all concealed utility lines, both interior and

exterior. Invert elevations, centerline dimensions, fitting locations, cleanout locations andvariations from the contract documents shall be indicated neatly and accurately on the as-builtdrawings. This provision shall apply to plumbing, heating, electrical and exterior pipe lines.

B. The Contractor shall keep an accurate record of all items that vary from the Work as indicatedon the contract documents and indicate these items on the As-Built drawings. This provisionshall apply to all phases of the Work.

C. The contractor shall indicate on the As-Built Drawings details of manufactured items as laterinstructed by the Architect. Details of Wood Trusses, Steel Joist and other pertinent items ofconstruction indicating the size and location of all members shall be included.

D. The As-Built drawings shall be drawn on reproducible prints of the pertinent ContractDocuments or additional reproducible sheets which will be furnished to the Contractor at thecost of reproductions. Include such supplementary notes, legends and details as may benecessary for legibility and clear portrayal of the As-Built Construction. Competent Draftsmenshall be employed to produce the As-Built Drawings. These drawings shall be submitted to theArchitect for approval within 3O days of the date of substantial completion. When approved theArchitect shall furnish to the Contractor a written receipt and approval notice for the As-BuiltDrawings.. The Contractor shall include in the schedule of values a reasonable sum of money toproduce the as-built drawings

1.04 INSTRUCTION AND GUARANTEESA. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval two Indexed Loose-leaf Notebooks

containing all guarantees, factory brochures for all equipment, operating, installation and



maintenance instructions for all items of Work; including names, addresses and telephonenumbers of all applicable Subcontractors divisions and into sections as indicated in the ProjectManual. Photocopies of color prints or toned prints shall not be used as part of thesesubmission. These instructions shall be submitted to the Architect for approval within 3O days ofthe date of substantial completion. When approved the Architect shall furnish to the Contractora written receipt and approval notice for the Instructions and Guarantees.

1.05 UTILITIESA. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all public utilities as necessary for the

construction of the work.B. The owner shall pay all connection fees for water, sewer, electrical power and natural gas

utilities.C. The contractor shall provide underground conduits for the telephone service and cable

television service and conduits for the electrical service required as indicated.D. The Contractor shall include in this scope of work the Contacting, scheduling, and coordination

of connecting all required permanent utilities to the building.1.06 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

A. The contractor shall install all owner furnished equipment. The installation shall include theconnection to the required building systems and shall be complete with all necessary elements.

1.07 GUARANTEE PERIODA. Workmanship and materials shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the DATE

OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, except as otherwise stated herein. In case of repair orreplacement of guaranteed items the said guarantee period shall begin anew for the itemrepaired or replaced.

1.08 SUBSTITUTIONSA. Unless otherwise indicated, trade names, catalog numbers, or manufacturer's products

indicated are to establish standards of quality and design and are not intended to exclude otherproducts of comparable quality and design. Some items shall be indicated in these documentsthat cannot be interchangeable for different items. If substitutions are desired, the Contractorshall furnish the complete list of proposed substitutions together with such engineering design ofand catalog data as the Architect may require. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to thecomparable quality and all proposed substitutions for the products or systems indicated.Proposed substitutions shall be submitted in writing to the Architect for consideration at leastseven days prior to the bidding date.

1.09 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSA. Unless otherwise indicated, trade names, catalog numbers, or manufacturer's products

indicated are for establishing standards of quality and design and will be considered asperformance specifications. The fire alarm system, fire suppression system, nurse call systemand all other building elements referenced in the development summary are to be installed inconformance with the referenced standards. All systems shall be completely operational with allrequired elements in all portions of the building. All such designations shall indicate by it'sinclusion in these documents, the published performance of the items indicated. If required bythe Architect the onus of proof of compliance with these performances shall be on theContractor.

1.10 CO-ORDINATION WITH ADJACENT FACILITIESA. The Contractor shall co-ordinate all work under the Contract for Construction with the

responsible parties to insure minimum interference with normal operations of any adjacentfacilities. The Contractor shall make arrangements with these parties to cut electric power orsewer and water service to any part of these facilities, so as not to compromise in any mannerthe health and safety of people using these facilities.



1.11 INSURANCEA. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon

the entire Work at the site. This insurance shall include the interests of The Owner (includingand financing institution), the Contractor and Subcontractors in the Work and shall insureagainst the perils of Fire, Extended Coverage Vandalism and Malicious Mischief. This insuranceshall remain in effect through the entire construction period.

B. Insurance shall not be written for less than as specified below;1. .1 Bodily Damage $1,000,000.00/Person

a. $3,000,000.00/ Occurrence2. .2 Property Damage $3,000,000.003. .3 Builders Risk $3,000,000.004. .4 Automobile $1,000,000.00

C. Certifications of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed in triplicate with the Ownerprior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coveragesafforded under the policies will not be canceled until at least fifteen days after written notice hasbeen given to the Architect.

1.12 JURISDICTIONA. In case of Judication in settling differences between the Owner and the Contractor the plea for

settlement shall be submitted to such court situated and having jurisdiction within thegeographic area in which the Project is located.

1.13 INDEMNIFICATIONA. Each Bidder by making his bid represents that he is capable of performing the work as indicated

in the Contract Documents and that he has notified the Architect of all ambiguities,inconsistencies or errors in the Bidding Documents, and said ambiguities or errors have beenduly corrected or interpreted. He further acknowledges and agrees, that due to his knowledge,expertise and experience in construction, he will hold harmless and indemnify the Architect andthe Owner for any ambiguities, inconsistencies or errors in the Bidding Documents that he mayhave failed to identify. By this acknowledgment the bidder is not claiming expertise in thearchitectural and engineering professions and thereby is not expected to identify errors of anesthetic nature or of engineering calculations, thereby the bidder is assuming no responsibilityfor errors of esthetics or engineering calculations. Notification to the Architect of ambiguities,inconsistencies or errors in the Bidding Documents should be made in writing and shall bemade prior to seven days before the bidding date.

1.14 CHANGES IN THE WORKA. All changes in the Work or modifications to the Contract Documents which (i) increase the

Contract Sum, or (ii) extend the Contract Time, or (iii) change the use or purpose of the projectmust have the prior written approval of the Owner and Architect. The allowance for overheadand profit combined, included in the total cost to the Owner, shall not exceed 10% of the cost. Inorder to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, expect those sominor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a completeitemization of costs in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are

B. Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a Change Order involving over$200.00 be approved without such itemization.

1.15 LIEN RELEASEA. Upon request of the Owner, Contractor shall promptly tender to the Owner and cause all

Subcontractors to promptly tender to the Owner acknowledgements of payments and releasesof liens and rights to claim liens which shall be unconditional releases through the date of thelast preceding advance (and concurrently with the final advance) under the construction loan forthe Project and which shall be conditional releases through the period relating to the currentApplication for Payment, all of which shall be in form and substance satisfactory to the Owner'sLender and title insurance company."



1.16 INCOMPLETE WORKA. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, if Contractor fails to complete construction of or

Work related to any punch list items within sixty (60) days from the earlier of the date on whichArchitect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion or the date on which a temporary orpermanent certificate of occupancy is issued for the Project, Owner shall have the right tocomplete such Construction or Work after a 14 day written notice to Contractor and Contractorshall immediately reimburse Owner upon demand for all costs in connection therewith. Ownershall also have the right at any time to offset any retainer being held for such costs, withContractor being liable for the balance of such costs. If any Subcontractor, supplier, or otherperson under the contractor’s control, makes, records, or files, or maintains any action on orrespecting a claim of mechanic's lien, stop-notice, equitable lien, payment, or performancebond, relating to the Work, the Contractor shall immediately and at its own expense procure,furnish and record appropriate statutory release bonds, which will extinguish or expunge saidclaim or stop notice, provided the owners payments to the contractor are current per Article 9 ofthe general conditions.

1.17 REQUEST FOR INFORMATIONA. All requests for information and/or clarifications shall be submitted to the architect in writing. Any

information required prior bidding shall be received by the architect no later than seven daysprior to the bid receipt date. Request for information during construction shall be submittedtwenty one days prior to the need for response.

1.18 INSTALLATIONA. All materials indicated on the drawings and specifications shall be installed in accordance with

the manufacturers recommendations unless otherwise indicated.1.19 BUILDING ENVELOPE

A. The facility is designed to prevent the penetration of moisture from the exterior. All exteriorbuilding enclosure elements (walls and roofs) shall have a vapor barrier with a rating equal to orexceeding one perm. All openings shall have flashing equal to or exceeding 20 mils in thicknessand shall be installed to return moisture to the exterior.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01 1000SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 PROJECT

A. Project Name: STAFFORD SKILLED NURSING FACILITYB. Owner's Name: Stafford SNF Investors LLC.C. Architect's Name: JONES & JONES ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS PC.D. The Project consists of the construction of Skilled Nursing Facility.

1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTIONA. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document

00 5000 - Contracting Forms and Supplements.1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.B. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01 2500SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions.PART 3 EXECUTION2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. A Substitution Request for products, assemblies, materials, and equipment constitutes arepresentation that the submitter:1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality

level of the specified product, equipment, assembly, or system.2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for

the work to be complete, with no additional cost to Owner.4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become

apparent.B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution

with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer.C. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request,

and information necessary to provide an actionable response.D. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item.

2.02 RESOLUTIONA. Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision.

Provide this data in an expeditious manner.END OF SECTION



SECTION 01 3000ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


A. Preconstruction meeting.B. Progress meetings.C. Construction progress schedule.D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.E. Submittal procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Architect may schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.B. Attendance Required:

1. Owner.2. Architect.3. Contractor.

C. Agenda:1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.2. Distribution of Contract Documents.3. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress

schedule.4. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, ________ and Architect.5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for

payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.6. Scheduling.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with twocopies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGSA. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the work at maximum monthly

intervals.B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at

meetings.C. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor.2. Owner.3. Architect.4. Contractor's superintendent.

D. Agenda:1. Review of work progress.2. Field observations, problems, and decisions.3. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.4. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.5. Planned progress during succeeding work period.6. Other business relating to work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with twocopies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.



3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULEA. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.

3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEWA. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data.2. Shop drawings.3. Samples for selection.4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance withinformation given and the design concept expressed in Contract Documents.

C. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - CloseoutSubmittals.

3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATIONA. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

1. Design data.2. Certificates.3. Test reports.4. Inspection reports.5. Manufacturer's instructions.6. Manufacturer's field reports.7. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in

compliance with requirements of Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals:1. Project record documents.2. Operation and maintenance data.3. Warranties.4. Other types as indicated.

D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.3.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Requirements:B. All submittals and Requests for information will be submitted by means and methods acceptable

to the Architect.C. For each submittal for review, allow 21 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.D. BOLDLY Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that

may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. Also any productsubmitted "as equal"

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01 4000QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 3 EXECUTION1.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, andworkmanship, to produce work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Architect before proceeding.D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more preciseworkmanship.

E. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the

manufacturer.G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand

stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.1.02 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements.END OF SECTION



SECTION 01 4100REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY OF REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. All work shall comply with all federal, state, and local regulations, laws, ordinances and codesgoverning the work there under. Applicable codes and supplements are incorporated into thesedocuments by reference.

B. Regulatory requirements applicable to this project are the following:C. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.D. 29 CFR 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.E. State of Virginia amendments to some or all of the following.F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.G. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.H. ICC (IPC) - International Plumbing Code; 2015.I. ICC (IMC) - International Mechanical Code; 2012.J. ICC (IFGC) - International Fuel Gas Code; 2012.K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor's Designer Qualifications: Refer to Section - 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.END OF SECTION



SECTION 01 5000TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


A. Temporary utilities.B. Temporary sanitary facilities.C. Waste removal facilities and services.D. Project identification sign.E. Field offices.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities.B. Section 01 5213 - Field Offices and Sheds.C. Section 01 5813 - Temporary Project Signage.

1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - SEE SECTION 01 5100A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation

required for construction purposes.1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.

1.05 WASTE REMOVALA. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and

orderly condition.B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable

non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structureunless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containerswith lids.

1.06 PROJECT IDENTIFICATIONA. Provide project identification sign of design and construction as follows: A Job Sign bearing the

name of the Project, the Owner, the General Contractor and the Architect shall be erected onthe job site at a position as directed by the Architect. The sign shall be painted as directed bythe Architect on a sheet of 5/8" x 4'-0" x 8'-0" AC Fir Plywood. The sign shall be painted by acompetent sign painter. No other signs shall be erected on the job site except the buildingpermit and material suppliers identification signs may be placed on the sides of the field office.

B. Erect on site at location established by Architect.C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.

1.07 FIELD OFFICES - SEE SECTION 01 5213A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped

with sturdy furniture, drawing rack, and drawing display table.B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.C. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01 5100TEMPORARY UTILITIES


A. Temporary Utilities: Provision of electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, and water.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls:1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.1.04 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. Cost: By Contractor.1.05 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. Provide and maintain LED, compact fluorescent, or high-intensity discharge lighting as suitablefor the application for construction operations in accordance with requirements of 29 CFR 1926and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.1.06 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. Cost of Energy: By Contractor.B. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction

operations.1.07 TEMPORARY COOLING

A. Provide cooling devices and cooling as needed to maintain specified conditions for constructionoperations.

B. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F in areas where construction is inprogress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

1.08 TEMPORARY VENTILATION1.09 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. Cost of Water Used: By Contractor.END OF SECTION



SECTION 01 6000PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.B. Product option requirements.C. Substitution limitations.D. Procedures for Owner-supplied products.E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

1.02 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to

identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electricalcharacteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service forfunctional equipment and appliances.

C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, withintegral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents.2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meetingthose standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of themanufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALSA. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in

individual specification sections.B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS

A. See Section 01 2500 - Substitution Procedures.3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS

A. Contractor's Responsibilities:1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with

Owner.3. Handle, store, install and finish products.4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.



3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTIONA. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to

installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due toexcessive materials handling and misapplication. See Section 01 7419.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment

favorable to product.E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,

precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and othercontaminants.

G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to

prevent condensation and degradation of products.I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify

products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.END OF SECTION



SECTION 01 6116VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit evidence of

compliance.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALSPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and requiretheir removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner.

B. Additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will beborne by Contractor.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01 7000EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, as approved byArchitect..

B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.C. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities.D. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance

data, warranties, and bonds.E. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Demonstration of products and systems to be

commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sectionsF. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patchingand extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products wherenecessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitutiondescribed in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work beingapplied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize

waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct

locations.F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements

subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching meansacceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to

applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.



C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical andhorizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work.2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.8. Remove and replace defective and non-complying work.

C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriatesurfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore tooriginal condition.

D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistantelements, and sight exposed surfaces.

E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without priorapproval.

F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids

with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetratedelement.

I. Patching:1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous

surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entireunit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other

imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repairsubstrate prior to repairing finish.

3.05 PROGRESS CLEANINGA. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition.B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed

or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning

to eliminate dust.D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose

off-site; do not burn or bury.3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.



C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediatework area to prevent damage.

D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement

of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is

necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing materialmanufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible.3.07 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by

the equipment or system manufacturer.D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's

representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.3.08 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION

A. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.

B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for otherseason within six months.

C. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstrationand instruction of Owner's personnel.

3.09 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

3.10 FINAL CLEANINGA. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains

and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and softsurfaces.

D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels ornameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to thesurface and material being cleaned.

F. Clean filters of operating equipment.G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, drainage

systems, and ______.H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;

dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.3.11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.



B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed forcompletion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice ofSubstantial Completion.

C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completioninspection.

D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that ContractDocuments have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete inaccordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completioninspection.

E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containingArchitect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or correctedand submit to Architect.

F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements foraccess to Owner-occupied areas.

G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's SubstantialCompletion final inspection.

H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of SubstantialCompletion.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03 0516UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER


A. Sheet vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Preparation of subgrade, granular fill, placement of

concrete.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of WaterVapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011.

B. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact withSoil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Underslab Vapor Barrier:1. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 0.010 perms, maximum.

B. Accessory Products: Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, etc.,for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643.B. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade; lap sheet over footings and seal to foundation

walls.C. Lap joints minimum 6 inches.D. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and

follow manufacturer's written instructions.E. No penetration of vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.F. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with other materials.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03 1000CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES


A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.B. Openings for other work.C. Form stripping.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.C. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry.D. Section 04 2001 - Masonry Veneer: Spacing for veneer anchor reglets recessed in concrete.E. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates

in cast-in-place concrete.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;2010.

B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints

and ties.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Designer Qualifications: Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional StructuralEngineer experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in the State in which theProject is located.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL

A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplishcast-in-place concrete work.

B. Design and construct concrete that complies with design with respect to shape, lines, anddimensions.

C. Chamfer outside corners of beams, joists, columns, and walls.D. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and

removal of formwork.E. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318.


A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agreewith drawings.



3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORKA. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with

requirements of ACI 301.B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to

overstressing by construction loads.3.03 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its ownweight and imposed loads.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 03 2000CONCRETE REINFORCING


A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.C. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.C. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.D. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete

Reinforcement; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.F. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015.G. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of

bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.B. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS

qualification within the previous 12 months.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi).B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Plain type; ASTM A1064/A1064M.

2.02 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PLACEMENT

A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from requiredposition.

B. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:1. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 3 inch.

C. Comply with applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.



D. Bond and ground all reinforcement to requirements of Section 26 0526.END OF SECTION



SECTION 03 3000CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


A. Floors and slabs on grade.B. Joint devices associated with concrete work.C. Concrete curing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.B. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw

cut joints and isolation joints in slabs.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;2010.

B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007).D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000.E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010.G. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008).H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.I. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015.J. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016.K. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens; 2015a.L. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2015.M. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012.N. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.O. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.P. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.Q. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink); 2014.R. ASTM D2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting; 2015.S. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor

Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008).T. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water

Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011.U. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with

Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.



B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance withspecified requirements and installation instructions.

C. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.D. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.E. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FORMWORK

A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 1000.2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 2000.2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M.

2.04 ADMIXTURESA. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight

of cement.B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Sheet material complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by

manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited.1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,

mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.B. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,

cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.1. Grout: Comply with ASTM C1107/C1107M.

2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTSA. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top

section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal.B. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel,

with rectangular or round knockout holes for conduit or rebar to pass through joint form at 6inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting.


A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement ofform accessories.

B. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap jointsminimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's



recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vaporretarder before covering.1. Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactible granular fill before placing vapor

retarder as indicated on drawings. Do not use sand.3.03 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint

devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.D. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.

3.04 SLAB JOINTINGA. Locate joints as indicated on drawings.B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total

height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours

after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter(1/4) the depth of the slab.

3.05 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:

1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.3. Under Carpeting: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.

B. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.C. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas

requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thin

floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, resinous matrixterrazzo, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile.

2. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizingburnish marks and other appearance defects.

3.07 CURING AND PROTECTIONA. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from

premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 014000 - Quality Requirements.

B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.C. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M, for each test, mold and cure three concrete

test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cubic yards or less of each class of concreteplaced.

D. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under sameconditions as concrete it represents.



E. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTMC143/C143M.

3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETEA. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor

within 24 hours of test.B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances

or specified requirements.C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of

additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.END OF SECTION

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C143/C143M











SECTION 04 0100MAINTENANCE OF MASONRY


A. Section 04 0511 - Mortar and Masonry Grout.B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Brick masonry units.C. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Mortar and grout.D. Section 04 4313 - Stone Masonry Veneer.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures

and Related Commentaries; 2011.1.03 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA orapplicable building code, whichever is more stringent.

PART 2 PRODUCTSPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 CLEANING NEW MASONRY

A. Verify mortar is fully set and cured.B. Clean surfaces and remove large particles with wood scrapers, brass or nylon wire brushes.

3.02 CLEANINGA. Immediately remove stains, efflorescence, or other excess resulting from the work of this

section.B. Remove excess mortar, smears, and droppings as work proceeds and upon completion.C. Clean surrounding surfaces.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 04 0511MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT

PART 2 PRODUCTS1.01 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS

A. Mortar Mix Designs: ASTM C270, Property Specification.1.02 MATERIALS

A. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.B. Water: Clean and potable.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 04 2000UNIT MASONRY


A. Concrete block.B. Concrete building brick.C. Clay facing brick.D. Common brick.E. Mortar and grout.F. Reinforcement and anchorage.G. Flashings.H. Lintels.I. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 04 0100 - Maintenance of Masonry.B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.B. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.C. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.D. ASTM D4637/D4637M - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof

Membrane; 2013.E. BIA Technical Notes No. 7 - Water Penetration Resistance – Design and Detailing; 2005.F. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2016.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and

masonry accessories.C. Samples: Submit 2 samples of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes

of color range.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements ofContract Documents.

1.06 MOCK-UPA. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 6 feet long by 4 feet high; include mortar,

accessories, structural backup, and flashings (with lap joint, corner, and end dam) in mock-up.B. Locate where directed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BRICK UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. General Shale Brick; Raleigh Court: www.generalshale.com.2. Coco Velour, accent.



2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALSA. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M, Type S.

1. Colored Mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample.2. Manufacturers:

a. Lonestar Flamingo C-81B. Water: Clean and potable.

2.03 FLASHINGSA. EPDM Flashing: ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type I, 0.040 inch thick.

2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXINGA. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.

1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type M.2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type S.

B. Grout: ASTM C476; consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; finegrout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaceswith smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.3.02 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during,and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during,and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

3.03 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTSA. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally on top of

through-wall flashing above shelf angles and lintels and at bottom of walls.3.04 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at alllocations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.

B. Install flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and BIA Technical Notes No. 7.C. Extend plastic, laminated, and EPDM flashings to within 1/2 inch of exterior face of masonry and

adhere to top of stainless steel angled drip with hemmed edge.3.05 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.B. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not indicated, 3/4 inch wide and deep.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 05 1200STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING


A. Structural steel framing members.B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.C. Grouting under base plates.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing.B. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.B. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011 (Reapproved

2015).C. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012.D. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments,and fasteners.

2. Connections.3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.


A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M.C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.

2.02 FABRICATIONA. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.

2.03 FINISHA. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 3.B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field

welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.END OF SECTION



SECTION 06 1000ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Structural dimension lumber framing.B. Non-structural dimension lumber framing.C. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.D. Sheathing.E. Subflooring.F. Roof-mounted curbs.G. Roofing nailers.H. Preservative treated wood materials.I. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.J. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.K. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.L. Roof sheathing with factory applied roofing underlayment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Prefabricated beams and columns for support of

wood framing.B. Section 06 1753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses.C. Section 06 1800 - Glued-Laminated Construction.D. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier over sheathing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWC (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; 2015.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.D. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood

Framing; 2003 (Reapproved 2009).E. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.F. ASTM D3498 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Wood Structural Panels

(Plywood or Oriented Strand Board) to Wood Based Floor System Framing; 2018a.G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.H. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012.I. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.J. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2010.K. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010.L. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.



B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, andapplication instructions.

C. Structural Composite Lumber: Submit manufacturer's published structural data including spantables, marked to indicate which sizes and grades are being used; if structural compositelumber is being substituted for dimension lumber or timbers, submit grading agency structuraltables marked for comparison.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent

deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.1. Species: Spruce-Pine-Fir (South), unless otherwise indicated.2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no

grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting thespecified requirements.

3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading servicefor the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unlessotherwise indicated.

4. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearancecharacteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONSA. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc; SPIB (GR).B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.D. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ):

1. Machine stress-rated (MSR) as follows:a. Fb-single (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending): 1350 psi.b. E (minimum modulus of elasticity): 1,300,000 psi.

E. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELSA. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: Oriented strand board wood structural panel; PS 2, rated

Single Floor.1. Span Rating: 20.2. Edges: Tongue and groove.3. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.4. Manufacturers:

a. Huber Engineered Woods, LLC; AdvanTech Flooring with AdvanTech SubfloorAdhesive: www.huberwood.com/#sle.

B. Roof Sheathing: Any PS 2 type, rated Structural I Sheathing.1. Bond Classification: Exterior.2. Span Rating: 24.3. Performance Category: 3/4 PERF CAT.

C. Roof Sheathing: Oriented strand board wood structural panel; PS 2.1. Grade: Structural 1 Sheathing.



D. Roof Sheathing: Oriented strand board structural wood panel, PS 2, with factory laminatedroofing underlayment layer.

E. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium densityfiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 orless, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M forhigh humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

B. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185

galvanizing complying with ASTM A653/A653M.C. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from

continuous rolls. D. Subfloor Adhesives: Waterproof, air cure type, cartridge dispensed; adhesives designed for

subfloor applications and complying with either ASTM C557 or ASTM D3498.2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category Systemfor wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specificapplications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an

ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance withAWPA standards.

B. Preservative Treatment:1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category

UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative.a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory

components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately

after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that wouldlower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.

B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient tomaintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection andinstallation of permanent bracing.

C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and

spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes, AWC (WFCM) Wood FrameConstruction Manual, and ____________.

E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions thatare parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.



F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,specialty items, owner supplied equipment, and trim.

B. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports aboveceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

C. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:1. Cabinets and shelf supports.2. Wall brackets.3. Handrails.4. Grab bars.5. Towel and bath accessories.6. Wall-mounted door stops.7. Chalkboards and marker boards.8. Wall paneling and trim.9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.10. wall mounted lavatories.11. Wall mounted Televisions.

3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRYA. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and

roofing assembly installation.B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are specified and

where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted.B. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with

ends staggered and over firm bearing.1. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted.

C. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firmbearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.

D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs withedges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and intostuds in field of board.1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board

parallel to studs.3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.

3.07 TOLERANCESA. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet

maximum.END OF SECTION



SECTION 06 1753SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES


A. Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof and floor framing.B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage.C. Fire retardant treatment of wood.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Installation requirements for miscellaneous framing.B. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Material requirements for blocking, bridging, plates,

and miscellaneous framing.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) orZinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

B. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; 2014.C. TPI 1 - National Design Standard for Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Construction; 2007

and errata.D. TPI BCSI 1 - Building Component Safety Information Booklet: The Guide to Good Practice for

Handling, Installing & Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; 2011.E. TPI DSB-89 - Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate

Connected Wood Trusses; 1989.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Show truss configurations, sizes, spacing, size and type of plate connectors,

cambers, framed openings, bearing and anchor details, and bridging and bracing.1. Provide shop drawings stamped or sealed by design engineer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Designer Qualifications: Perform design by or under direct supervision of a Professional

Structural ____________ Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the Statein which the Project is located.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TRUSSES

A. Wood Trusses: Designed and fabricated in accordance with TPI 1 and TPI DSB-89 to achievestructural requirements indicated.1. Species and Grade: Southern Pine, SPIB (GR) Grade __________.2. Structural Design: Comply with applicable code for structural loading criteria.3. Floor Deflection: 1/360, maximum.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Lumber:

1. Moisture Content: Between 7 and 9 percent.B. Steel Connectors: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M Structural Steel (SS)

Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 coating; die stamped with integral teeth; thickness as indicated.C. Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by truss manufacturer.




A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.

3.02 ERECTIONA. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI DSB-89 and TPI BCSI 1;

maintain a copy of each TPI document on site until installation is complete.B. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure

plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.E. Install permanent bridging and bracing.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 06 2000FINISH CARPENTRY


A. Finish carpentry items.B. Wood door frames, glazed frames.C. Wood casings and moldings.D. Hardware and attachment accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.B. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work.C. Section 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS.D. Section 08 1433 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors.E. Section 08 5200 - Wood Windows.F. Section 12 3530 - Residential Casework: Shop fabricated cabinet work.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, installation of associated and

adjacent components, and ________.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.B. Product Data:C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS

A. Interior Woodwork Items:1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Clear white pine; prepare for paint

finish.2. Door, Glazed Light, and Pocket Door Frames: White birch; prepare for paint finish.3. Window Sills: Prepare for and provide cultured marble window sills.4. Loose Shelving: Birch plywood; prepare for paint finish.

2.02 FABRICATIONA. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and

ready to receive this work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.



B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not useadditional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 06 4100ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK


A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.B. Hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.0;

2016.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories.C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches

square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets,

demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect units from moisture damage.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Armstrong World Industries.2.02 CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

B. Cabinets:1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Wood.2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Decorative laminate in white color.3. Grained Face Layout for Cabinet and Door Fronts: Style and Rail, all Grades.4. Cabinet Design Series: As indicated on drawings.

2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALSA. Manufacturers:

1. Formica Corporation; color to be selected by Architect: www.formica.com.2. Wilsonart, LLC; Color TBS by Architect: www.wilsonart.com.

2.04 COUNTERTOPSA. Solid Surface countertops as designated on drawings or finish schedule.B. Plastic Laminate Countertops unless otherwise noted: Medium density fiberboard substrate

covered with HPDL, conventionally fabricated and self-edge banded.



2.05 HARDWAREA. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf

standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish,for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.

B. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers.C. Cabinet Locks as indicated and in Med Prep areas: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master

keyed, steel with chrome finish.D. Drawer Slides:

1. Type: Full extension.2.06 FABRICATION

A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permitpassage through building openings.

B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more thanone piece for any single length.

C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance forcutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.


A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.B. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not

use additional overlay trim for this purpose.END OF SECTION



SECTION 06 6100CAST POLYMER FABRICATIONS


A. Cast plastic washroom vanities, washroom vanities with integral sink, counter top, andWindowsills.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 12 3600 - Countertops: Solid surfacing countertops.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, thicknesses, required clearances, tolerances, materials,

colors, finishes, fabrication details, field jointing, adjacent construction, design load parameters,methods of support, integration of plumbing components, and anchorages.

C. Product Data: Provide data on specified component products, electrical characteristics andconnection requirements.


A. Provide finished products having flame spread index of 35 and smoke developed index of 15,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 in thickness of 3/4 inch.

B. Resin: Polyester; integrally-colored, stain-resistant and resistant to domestic chemicals andcleaners.

2.02 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate components by mold to achieve shape and configuration.B. Gel coat the finish exposed surfaces smooth and polish to a gloss sheen.C. Radius corners and edges.

2.03 FINISHA. Color: ________ color as selected.


A. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer'sinstructions.

B. Align work plumb and level.C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 06 8316FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELING


A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels.B. Trim.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of

Plastics; 2010.B. ASTM D5319 - Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling

Panels; 2012.C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels:1. Nudo; Fiberlite: www.nudo.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PANEL SYSTEMSA. Wall Panels at per drawing locations:

1. Panel Size: 4 by 8 feet.2. Panel Thickness: 0.09 inch.3. Surface Design: Embossed.4. Color: White.5. Attachment Method: Adhesive only, with trim and sealant in joints.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Panels: Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), complying with ASTM D5319.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smokedeveloped index of 450; when system tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Trim: Vinyl; color coordinating with panel.C. Adhesive: Type recommended by panel manufacturer.D. Sealant: Type recommended by panel manufacturer; white.


A. Verify existing conditions and substrate flatness before starting work.B. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive the work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION - WALLSA. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Cut and drill panels with carbide tipped saw blades, drill bits, or snips.C. Apply adhesive to the back side of the panel using trowel as recommended by adhesive

manufacturer.



D. Apply panels to wall with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels.E. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints.F. Place trim on panel before fastening edges, as required.G. Fill channels in trim with sealant before attaching to panel.H. Seal gaps at floor, ceiling, and between panels with applicable sealant to prevent moisture

intrusion.I. Remove excess sealant after paneling is installed and prior to curing.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 0553FIRE AND SMOKE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION

PART 2 PRODUCTS1.01 FIRE AND SMOKE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with "Marking and Identification" requirements of"Fire-Resistance Ratings and Fire Tests" chapter of ICC (IBC).

B. Applied Fire and Smoke Assembly Identification: Identification markings applied to partition withpaint and a code compliant stencil. See Section 09 9123 for products.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 2100THERMAL INSULATION


A. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall

and roof.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Supporting construction for batt insulation.B. Section 07 2126 - Blown Insulation: Blown-in, gravity-held fibrous insulation.C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials.D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block; 2008

(Reapproved 2012).B. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2015.C. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2015a.D. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.F. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750

Degrees C; 2012.G. ASTM E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies;

2011.H. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of

Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product

limitations.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board.B. Insulation Inside Prefabricated Wall Panels: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board.C. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder.D. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.E. Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.

2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALSA. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578 with either natural

skin or cut cell surfaces.1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88) per 1 inch thickness at 75

degrees F mean temperature.



2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALSA. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;

friction fit.1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for

facing, if any.4. Thermal Resistance: R of 38.5. Facing: paper.6. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; _____: www.certainteed.com/#sle.b. Johns Manville; _____: www.jm.com/#sle.c. Owens Corning Corporation; EcoTouch PINK FIBERGLAS Insulation:

www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.7. The partition insulation shall be 3" thick sound attenuation fire blanket (SAFB) as

manufactured by the United States Gypsum Company.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER

A. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter.B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

3.02 BATT INSTALLATIONA. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services

within the plane of the insulation.E. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on

center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face.F. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.G. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other

items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 2126BLOWN INSULATION


A. Exterior Walls: Blown insulation pneumatically placed into wall spaces through access holes.B. Ceiling and Attic: Blown insulation pneumatically placed into joist spaces through access holes.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C739 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber (Wood-Base) Loose-Fill Thermal

Insulation; 2011.B. ASTM C1015 - Standard Practice for Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill

Thermal Insulation; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and

thermal value.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Blown Insulation:1. CertainTeed Corporation; _____: www.certainteed.com/#sle.2. GreenFiber; _____: www.greenfiber.com/#sle.3. Thermafiber, Inc; _____: www.thermafiber.com/#sle.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Applications: Provide blown insulation in attic, exterior walls, and ceiling as indicated on

drawings.B. Blown Insulation: ASTM C739, cellulosic fiber type, nodulated for pour and bulk for pneumatic

placement.C. Ventilation Baffles: Formed plastic.


A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.B. Verify that light fixtures have thermal cut-out device to restrict over-heating in soffit or ceiling

spaces.C. Verify spaces are unobstructed to allow for proper placement of insulation.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install insulation and ventilation baffle in accordance with ASTM C1015 and manufacturer's

instructions.B. Place insulation pneumatically to completely fill stud, joist, and rafter spaces.C. Completely fill intended spaces leaving no gaps or voids.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 2500WEATHER BARRIERS


A. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.B. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt

insulation.C. Section 07 2400 - Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems: Water-resistive barrier under exterior

insulation.1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vaporretarders.

B. Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vaporpermeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacentsurfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers areclassified as vapor retarders.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 2014.B. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.C. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial,

and Agricultural Applications; 2010.D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.F. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES2.02 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)

A. Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened: 1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E2178.2. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant procedure).3. Water Penetration Resistance: Withstand a water head of 21 inches, minimum, for

minimum of 5 hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127.4. Ultraviolet (UV) and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for up to

180 days of weather exposure.5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed

index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.6. Seam and Perimeter Tape: Polyethylene self adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inches

wide, compatible with sheet material; unless otherwise specified.7. Manufacturers:

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E96/E96M












a. DuPont Building Innovations; Tyvek Commercial Wrap with StraightFlash,StraightFlash VF, Tyvek Wrap Caps, and Tyvek Tape: www.dupont.com.

b. Fiberweb, Inc; Typar MetroWrap: www.typar.com/#sle.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories for Sealing Weather Barrier and Sealing Weather Barrier toAdjacent Substrates: As specified or as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.


A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and

with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.C. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior:

1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal.2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12

inches.4. For applications specified to be air tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts

with self-adhesive tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by themanufacturer.

5. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings.6. Install head flashings under weather barrier.7. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into

opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing.D. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:

1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inchesonto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges.

2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flangesusing a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with sealingtape at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange.

3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to each side ofopening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing.

4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inchesbeyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.

5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing,using joint sealant over backer rod.

6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal toweather barrier surface.

END OF SECTION














































SECTION 07 3113ASPHALT SHINGLES


A. Asphalt shingle roofing.B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection.C. Associated metal flashings and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Roof sheathing.B. Section 06 1500 - Wood Decking: Roof decking.C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Edge and cap flashings.D. Section 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D226/D226M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in

Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009.B. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.C. ASTM D3161/D3161M - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Steep Slope Roofing

Products (Fan-Induced Method); 2016.D. ASTM D3462/D3462M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and

Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 2010a.E. ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2011.F. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples; 2018a.G. NRCA (RM) - The NRCA Roofing Manual; 2017.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics.C. Samples: Submit one samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish

texture/pattern; for color selection.D. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.1. Walk entire roof prior to installation, inspect sheathing, nail pattern, etc. report any

deficiencies.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 40degrees F.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide 15 year manufacturer's warranty for coverage against black streaks caused by algae.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Asphalt Shingles:



1. Certanteed; Product Landmark Pro.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ASPHALT SHINGLESA. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM

D3462.1. Fire Resistance: Class A, complying with ASTM E108.2. Wind Resistance: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3161.3. Self-sealing type.4. Color: As selected by Architect.

2.03 SHEET MATERIALSA. Eave Protection Membrane: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with

ASTM D1970/D1970M; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper andpolyethylene sheet top surface.

B. Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt, unperforated, complying with ASTMD226/D226M, Type II ("No.30").

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Roofing Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum

roofing nails, or copper roofing nails, minimum 3/8 inch head diameter, 12 gage, 0.109 inch nailshank diameter, 1-1/2 inch long and complying with ASTM F1667.

B. Plastic Ridge Vents: Extruded plastic with vent openings that do not permit direct water orweather entry; flanged to receive shingles.

2.05 METAL FLASHINGSA. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, gable edge, chimney flashing, dormer

flashing, and other flashing indicated.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.B. Verify that roof deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners.C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface.D. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.

3.02 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANEA. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 4 ft up-slope beyond interior face

of exterior wall.B. Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA

(RM) applicable requirements.3.03 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT

A. Underlayment At Roof Slopes Greater Than 4:12: Install underlayment perpendicular to slopeof roof, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 6 inches, stagger end laps of eachconsecutive layer, nail in place, and weather lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection.

B. Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement any items projecting through or mounted onroof.

3.04 INSTALLATION - SHINGLESA. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions manufacturer's instructions and

NRCA (RM) applicable requirements.1. Fasten individual shingles using per mftr. nails per shingle, or as required by manufacturer

and local building code, whichever is greater.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D3462







http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D1970/D1970M





































2. Fasten strip shingles using four nails per strip, or as required by manufacturer and localbuilding code, whichever is greater.

B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce doublethickness over full roof area, and provide double course of shingles at eaves.

C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards.D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards.E. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with

weather tight placement of counterflashings.F. Complete installation to provide weather tight service.

END OF SECTION
















SECTION 07 4646FIBER-CEMENT SIDING


A. Fiber-cement siding.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Siding substrate.B. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Water-resistive barrier under siding.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008 (Reapproved 2016).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Installation methods, including nail patterns.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING

A. Lap Siding: Individual horizontal boards made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under highpressure with integral surface texture, complying to ASTM C1186, Type A, Grade II; withmachined edges, for nail attachment.1. Style: Standard lap style.2. Texture: Simulated cedar grain.3. Length: 12 ft, nominal.4. Width (Height): 7-1/4 inches.5. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal.6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of available colors.7. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable.

B. Shingle Panels: Panels giving appearance of multiple shingles made of cement and cellulosefiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186,Type A, Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment.1. Style: Random width, staggered edge.2. Texture: Wood grain textured.3. Length: 48 inches.4. Width (Height): 7 inches.5. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal.6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of available colors.7. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Trim: smooth.B. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4

inch.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.1. Read warranty and comply with terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage.



2. Use trim details indicated on drawings.3. Touch up field cut edges before installing.4. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.

B. Allow space for thermal movement between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim;seal joint between panel and trim with specified sealant.

C. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints areinevitable stagger joints between successive courses.

D. Do not install siding less than 6 inches from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch to roofs,patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.

E. After installation, seal joints except lap joints of lap siding; seal around penetrations, and paintexposed cut edges.

3.02 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 5300ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING


A. Elastomeric roofing membrane, mechanically fastened conventional and adhered conventionalapplication.

B. Insulation, tapered.C. Flashings.D. Roofing cant strips, stack boots, roofing expansion joints, and walkway pads.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood nailers and curbs.B. Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units; prefabricated curbs.C. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Roof drains.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2012.B. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2015a.C. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic

Elastomers--Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013).D. ASTM D4637/D4637M - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof

Membrane; 2013.E. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of

this section; require attendance by all affected installers; review preparation and installationprocedures and coordination and scheduling necessary for related work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, vapor

retarder, surfacing, and fasteners.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions and conditions of interface with

other materials.D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer's material and labor warranty to cover failure to prevent

penetration of water.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. EPDM Membrane Materials:1. Carlisle Roofing Systems, Inc; Sure-Seal EPDM: www.carlisle-syntec.com/#sle.2. Firestone Building Products, LLC; _____: www.firestonebpco.com/#sle.

2.02 ROOFING - UNBALLASTED APPLICATIONSA. Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, mechanically fastened, over vapor

retarder and insulation.



2.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALSA. Membrane: Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM); externally reinforced with fabric;

complying with minimum properties of ASTM D4637/D4637M.1. Thickness: 0.060 inch.2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range.

B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.C. Membrane Fasteners: As recommended by and approved by membrane manufacturer.D. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane; same

material as membrane.B. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.C. Walkway Pads: Suitable for maintenance traffic, contrasting color or otherwise visually

distinctive from roof membrane.1. Composition: Roofing membrane manufacturer's standard.2. Size: As indicated.3. Surface Color: White or yellow.


A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.B. Verify deck is supported and secure.C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped

and suitable for installation of roof system.D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips

are in place.3.02 MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching.B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage.C. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches. Seal

permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.D. Mechanical Attachment: Apply membrane and mechanical attachment devices in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions.E. At intersections with vertical surfaces:

1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches onto vertical surfaces.2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips.

F. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing.G. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 5423THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO)


A. Thermoplastic membrane roofing system, including all components specified.B. Comply with the published recommendations and instructions of the roofing membrane

manufacturer, at http://manual.fsbp.com.C. Commencement of work by Contractor shall constitute acknowledgement by Contractor that this

specification can be satisfactorily executed, under the project conditions and with all necessaryprerequisites for warranty acceptance by roofing membrane manufacturer. No modification ofthe Contract Sum will be made for failure to adequately examine the Contract Documents or theproject conditions.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood nailers associated with roofing and roof

insulation.B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Formed metal flashing and trim items

associated with roofing.C. Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties: Manufactured copings, fascias, gravel stops, and other

flashing-related items.D. Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Roof hatches, vents, and manufactured curbs.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 - Test Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing

Systems; 2017.B. ASTM C1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient

Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer; 2009 (Reapproved 2014).C. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2014.D. ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear) of Plastic Film and

Sheeting; 2013.E. ASTM D6878/D6878M - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet

Roofing; 2013.F. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.G. FM 4470 - Approval Standard for Single-Ply, Polymer-Modified Bitumen Sheet, Built-Up Roof

(BUR) and Liquid Applied Roof Assemblies for use in Class 1 and Noncombustible Roof DeckConstruction; 2016.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data:

1. Provide membrane manufacturer's printed data sufficient to show that all components ofroofing system, including insulation and fasteners, comply with the specified requirementsand with the membrane manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for thesystem type specified; include data for each product used in conjunction with roofingmembrane.

C. Executed Warranty.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals andlabels intact and legible.

B. Store materials clear of ground and moisture with weather protective covering.



C. Keep combustible materials away from ignition sources.1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Comply with all warranty procedures required by manufacturer, including notifications,

scheduling, and inspections.C. Warranty: Firestone Limited Warranty covering membrane, roof insulation, and other indicated

components of the system, for the term indicated.1. Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation.2. Scope of Coverage: Repair leaks in the roofing system caused by:

a. Ordinary wear and tear of the elements.b. Manufacturing defect in Firestone brand materials.c. Defective workmanship used to install these materials.d. Damage due to winds up to 55 mph.

3. Not Covered:a. Damage due to winds in excess of 55 mph.b. Damage due hurricanes or tornadoes.c. Hail.d. Intentional damage.e. Unintentional damage due to normal rooftop inspections, maintenance, or service.


A. Acceptable Manufacturer - Roofing System: Firestone Building Products LLC, Carmel, IN: www.firestonebpco.com/#sle.

B. Manufacturer of Metal Roof Edging: Same manufacturer as roof membrane.1. Metal roof edging products by other manufacturers are not acceptable.2. Field- or shop-fabricated metal roof edgings are not acceptable.

2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA. Roofing System: Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) single-ply membrane.

1. Membrane Attachment: Mechanically fastened.2. Warranty: Full system warranty; Firestone 20 year Red Shield Limited Warranty covering

membrane, roof insulation, and membrane accessories.3. Comply with applicable local building code requirements.

B. Roofing System Components: Listed in order from the top of the roof down:1. Membrane: Thickness as specified.2. Insulation:

a. Maximum Board Thickness: 3 inches; use as many layers as necessary; staggerjoints in adjacent layers.

2.03 MEMBRANE MATERIALSA. Membrane: Flexible, heat weldable sheet composed of thermoplastic polyolefin polymer and

ethylene propylene rubber; complying with ASTM D6878/D6878M, with polyester weft insertedreinforcement and the following additional characteristics:1. Thickness: 0.060 inch plus/minus 10 percent, with coating thickness over reinforcement of

0.024 inch plus/minus 10 percent.2. Puncture Resistance: 265 lbf, minimum, when tested in accordance FTM 101C Method

2031.3. Solar Reflectance: 0.79, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1549.4. Color: White.

B. Membrane Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofingsystem and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membranemanufacturer.



C. Curb and Parapet Flashing: Same material as membrane, with encapsulated edge whicheliminates need for seam sealing the flashing-to-roof splice; precut to 18 inches wide.

D. Formable Flashing: Non-reinforced, flexible, heat weldable sheet, composed of thermoplasticpolyolefin polymer and ethylene propylene rubber.1. Thickness: 0.060 inch plus/minus 10 percent.2. Tensile Strength: 1550 psi, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638 after

heat aging.3. Elongation at Break: 650 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638

after heat aging.4. Tearing Strength: 12 lbf, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1004 after

heat aging.5. Color: White.6. Acceptable Product: UltraPly TPO Flashing by Firestone.

E. Tape Flashing: 5-1/2 inch nominal wide TPO membrane laminated to cured rubber polymerseaming tape, overall thickness 0.065 inch nominal; TPO QuickSeam Flashing by Firestone.

F. Pourable Sealer: Two-part polyurethane, two-color for reliable mixing; Pourable Sealer byFirestone.

G. Seam Plates: Steel with barbs and Galvalume coating; corrosion-resistance complying with FM4470.

H. Termination Bars: Aluminum bars with integral caulk ledge; 1.3 inches wide by 0.10 inch thick;Firestone Termination Bar by Firestone.

I. Cut Edge Sealant: Synthetic rubber-based, for use where membrane reinforcement is exposed;UltraPly TPO Cut Edge Sealant by Firestone.

J. General Purpose Sealant: EPDM-based, one part, white general purpose sealant; UltraPly TPOGeneral Purpose Sealant by Firestone.

K. Molded Flashing Accessories: Unreinforced TPO membrane pre-molded to suit a variety offlashing details, including pipe boots, inside corners, outside corners, etc.; UltraPly TPO Smalland Large Pipe Flashing by Firestone.

L. Roof Walkway Pads: Non-reinforced TPO walkway pads, 0.130 inch by 30 inches by 40 feetlong with patterned traffic bearing surface; UltraPly TPO Walkway Pads by Firestone.

2.04 METAL ACCESSORIESA. Metal Roof Edging and Fascia: Continuous metal edge member serving as termination of roof

membrane and retainer for metal fascia; watertight with no exposed fasteners; mounted to roofedge nailer.1. Wind Performance:

a. Membrane Pull-Off Resistance: 100 lbs/ft, minimum, when tested in accordance withANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 using test method RE-1.

b. Fascia Pull-Off Resistance: At least minimum required when tested in accordancewith ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 using test method RE-2.

c. Provide product listed in FM (AG) with at least FM 1-270 rating.2. Fascia Face Height: 5 inches.3. Edge Member Height Above Nailer: 1-1/4 inches.4. Length: 144 inches.5. Functional Characteristics: Fascia retainer supports while allowing for free thermal cycling

of fascia.6. Aluminum Bar: Continuous 6063-T6 alloy aluminum extrusion with pre-punched slotted

holes; miters welded; injection molded EPDM splices to allow thermal expansion.7. Anchor Bar Cleat: 20 gage, 0.036 inch G90 coated commercial type galvanized steel with

pre-punched holes.8. Curved Applications: Factory modified.

http://www.fmglobal.com


















https://www.spri.org
















9. Fasteners: Factory-provided corrosion resistant fasteners, with drivers; no exposedfasteners permitted.

10. Special Shaped Components: Provide factory-fabricated pieces necessary for completeinstallation, including miters, scuppers, and end caps; minimum 14 inch long legs oncorner pieces.

11. Scuppers: Welded watertight.12. Accessories: Provide matching brick wall cap, downspout, extenders, and other special

fabrications as shown on the drawings.B. Parapet Copings: Formed metal coping with galvanized steel anchor/support cleats for capping

any parapet wall; watertight, maintenance free, without exposed fasteners; butt type joints withconcealed splice plates; mechanically fastened as indicated; Firestone PTCF.1. Wind Performance:

a. At least minimum required when tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1using test method RE-3.

b. Provide product listed in FM (AG) with at least FM 1-90 rating.2. Description: Coping sections allowed to expand and contract freely while locked in place

on anchor cleats by mechanical pressure from hardened stainless steel springs factoryattached to anchor cleats; 8 inch wide splice plates with factory applied dual non-curingsealant strips capable of providing watertight seal.

3. Dimensions:a. Wall Width: As indicated on the drawings.b. Piece Length: Minimum 144 inches.c. Curved Application: Factory fabricated in true radius.

4. Anchor/Support Cleats: 20 gage, 0.036 inch thick prepunched galvanized cleat with 12inch wide stainless steel spring mechanically locked to cleat at 72 inches on center.

5. Special Shaped Components: Provide factory-fabricated pieces necessary for completeinstallation, including miters, corners, intersections, curves, pier caps, and end caps;minimum 14 inch long legs on corner, intersection, and end pieces.

6. Fasteners: Factory-furnished; electrolytically compatible; minimum pull out resistance of240 pounds for actual substrate used; no exposed fasteners.

PART 3 INSTALLATION3.01 GENERAL

A. Install roofing, insulation, flashings, and accessories in accordance with roofing manufacturer'spublished instructions and recommendations for the specified roofing system. Wheremanufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations, follow good roofing practices andindustry standards. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

B. Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration of installationperiod.

C. Do not start work until Pre-Installation Notice has been submitted to manufacturer as notificationthat this project requires a manufacturer's warranty.

D. Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel.E. Temporary closures, which ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the

new roofing system, are the responsibility of the applicator. Completion of flashings, terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertightcondition.

F. Install roofing membrane only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and free of snow or ice; donot apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when ambient conditions will not allowproper application; consult manufacturer for recommended procedures during cold weather. Donot work with sealants and adhesives when material temperature is outside the range of 60 to80 degrees F.

G. Protect adjacent construction, property, vehicles, and persons from damage related to roofingwork; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work.



















1. Protect from spills and overspray from bitumen, adhesives, sealants and coatings.2. Particularly protect metal, glass, plastic, and painted surfaces from bitumen, adhesives,

and sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray.3. Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic and traffic by

other trades.H. Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by the manufacturer.I. Consult membrane manufacturer's instructions, container labels, and Material Safety Data

Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives, sealants, primers andcleaning materials away from all sources of ignition.

3.02 EXAMINATIONA. Examine roof deck to determine that it is sufficiently rigid to support installers and their

mechanical equipment and that deflection will not strain or rupture roof components or deformdeck.

B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. Correct defects in thesubstrate before commencing with roofing work.

C. Examine roof substrate to verify that it is properly sloped to drains.D. Verify that the specifications and drawing details are workable and not in conflict with the roofing

manufacturer's recommendations and instructions; start of work constitutes acceptable ofproject conditions and requirements.

3.03 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE INSTALLATIONA. Beginning at low point of roof, place membrane without stretching over substrate and allow to

relax at least 30 minutes before attachment or splicing; in colder weather allow for longer relaxtime.

B. Lay out the membrane pieces so that field and flashing splices are installed to shed water.C. Install membrane without wrinkles and without gaps or fishmouths in seams; bond and test

seams and laps in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions and details.D. Install membrane mechanically attached to the substrate using seam battens, fasteners, and

edge securement as specified and as required by membrane manufacturers.E. Mechanical Attachment: Install fasteners in the seams, covered by membrane.

1. Lay out fasteners in compliance with FM Class specified in PART 2, as recommended bymembrane manufacturer, and as indicated, whichever is most stringent.

2. Properly engage fasteners in the deck with head flush with the countersunk portion ofseam plate.

F. Edge Securement: Secure membrane at all locations where membrane terminates or goesthrough an angle change greater than 2 in 12 inches using mechanically fastened reinforcedperimeter fastening strips, plates, or metal edging as indicated or as recommended by roofingmanufacturer.1. Exceptions: Round pipe penetrations less than 18 inches in diameter and square

penetrations less than 4 inches square.2. Metal edging is not merely decorative; ensure anchorage of membrane as intended by

roofing manufacturer.3.04 FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Install flashings, including laps, splices, joints, bonding, adhesion, and attachment, as requiredby membrane manufacturer's recommendations and details.

B. Metal Accessories: Install metal edgings, gravel stops, and copings in locations indicated onthe drawings, with horizontal leg of edge member over membrane and flashing over metal ontomembrane.1. Follow roofing manufacturer's instructions.2. Remove protective plastic surface film immediately before installation.3. Install water block sealant under the membrane anchorage leg.



4. Flash with manufacturer's recommended flashing sheet unless otherwise indicated.5. Where single application of flashing will not completely cover the metal flange, install

additional piece of flashing to cover the metal edge.6. If the roof edge includes a gravel stop and sealant is not applied between the laps in the

metal edging, install an additional piece of self-adhesive flashing membrane over the metallap to the top of the gravel stop; apply seam edge treatment at the intersections of the twoflashing sections.

7. When the roof slope is greater than 1:12, apply seam edge treatment along the back edgeof the flashing.

3.05 FINISHING AND WALKWAY INSTALLATIONA. Install walkways at access points to the roof, around rooftop equipment that may require

maintenance, and where indicated on the drawings.B. Walkway Pads: Adhere to the roofing membrane, spacing each pad at minimum of 1.0 inch

and maximum of 3.0 inches from each other to allow for drainage.1. If installation of walkway pads over field fabricated splices or within 6 inches of a splice

edge cannot be avoided, adhere another layer of flashing over the splice and extendingbeyond the walkway pad a minimum of 6 inches on either side.

2. Prime the membrane, remove the release paper on the pad, press in place, and walk onpad to ensure proper adhesion.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical

Representative employed by roofing system manufacturer specifically to inspect installation forwarranty purposes (i.e. not a sales person).

B. Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty.END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 6200SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, sheetmetal roofing, _______, and other items indicated in Schedule.

B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.C. Precast concrete splash pads.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 3113 - Asphalt Shingles: Non-metallic flashings associated with shingle roofing.B. Section 07 6100 - Sheet Metal Roofing.C. Section 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2012.B. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix);2015.

C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.D. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 20 gage, (0.032 inch) thick; anodized finish of color asselected.1. Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42/44 Class I integrally or electrolytically

colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick.B. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 20 gage, (0.032 inch) thick; plain finish

shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603;

baked enamel finish system.2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.02 FABRICATIONA. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use

sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with

sealant.F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 7123MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS


A. Pre-finished aluminum gutters and downspouts.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2012.B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.C. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Comply with SMACNA (ASMM) for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a

storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years.B. Comply with applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations, jointing methods, fastening methods,

locations, and installation details.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Pre-Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick.1. Finish: Plain, shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.02 COMPONENTSA. Gutters: Profile as indicated.B. Downspouts: CDA Rectangular profile.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated.B. Fabricate with required connection pieces.C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of

distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.D. Hem exposed edges of metal.E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.


A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Slope gutters 1/16 inch per foot, ___ percent minimum.C. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system. Grout connection watertight.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 7200ROOF ACCESSORIES


A. Curbs.B. Roof hatches, manual and automatic operation, including smoke vents.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 29 CFR 1910.23 - Guarding floor and wall openings and holes; current edition.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.4. Maintenance requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof Curbs Mounting Assemblies: Factory fabricated hollow sheet metal construction, internallyreinforced, and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads and designatedequipment load with fully mitered and sealed corner joints welded or mechanically fastened, andintegral counterflashing with top and edges formed to shed water.1. Applications: Roof curbs used for roof penetrations/openings as indicated on drawings.2. Roof Curb Mounting Substrate: Curb substrate consists of flat roof deck sheathing with

insulation.3. Provide layouts and configurations indicated on drawings.

2.02 ROOF HATCHES AND VENTS, MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC OPERATIONA. Sound Rated Roof Hatch Manufacturers:

1. BILCO Company; _______: www.bilco.com/#sle.B. Frames and Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof

flashings; extended bottom flange to suit mounting.1. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard; 1 inch rigid glass fiber, located on outside face of

curb.2. Curb Height: 12 inches from finished surface of roof, minimum.

C. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required bymanufacturer.1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that

automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load.2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 8400FIRESTOPPING


A. Firestopping systems.B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant

assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 0553 - Fire and Smoke Assembly Identification.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;2015.

B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2013a.C. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved

2011).D. FM 4991 - Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors; 2013.E. UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.F. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions

during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three daysafter installation of materials.


A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type ofmaterials as required for tested firestopping assembly.

B. Fire Ratings: Refer to drawings for required systems and ratings.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions, completely closing openings.

B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction.C. Install labeling required by code.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 07 9200JOINT SEALANTS


A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Sealant between tile and plumbing fixtures and at junctions with othermaterials and changes in plane.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2015.B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.C. ASTM C1087 - Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants

with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems; 2000 (Reapproved 2011).D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.E. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2008

(Reapproved 2012).F. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold

Liquid-Applied Sealants; 2002 (Reapproved 2013).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be

used, that includes the following.1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time,

and color availability.2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product.3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible.4. Substrates the product should not be used on.

C. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's colorcards showing standard colors available for selection.

D. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: Submit at least four weeks prior to start ofinstallation.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Arrange for sealant manufacturer(s) to test each

combination of sealant, substrate, backing, and accessories.1. Adhesion Testing: In accordance with ASTM C794.2. Compatibility Testing: In accordance with ASTM C1087.3. Allow sufficient time for testing to avoid delaying the work.4. Deliver to manufacturer sufficient samples for testing.5. Report manufacturer's recommended corrective measures, if any, including primers or

techniques not indicated in product data submittals.6. Testing is not required if sealant manufacturer provides data showing previous testing, not

older than 24 months, that shows satisfactory adhesion, lack of staining, and compatibility.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging orslumping.



1. Dow Chemical Company; _____: consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-construction.html/#sle.

2. Hilti, Inc; _____: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.3. Sherwin-Williams Company; _____: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

B. Self-Leveling Sealants: Pourable or self-leveling sealant that has sufficient flow to form asmooth, level surface when applied in a horizontal joint.1. Dow Chemical Company; _____:

consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-construction.html/#sle.2. QUIKRETE Companies; _____: www.quikrete.com/#sle.3. Sherwin-Williams Company; _____: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONSA. Scope:

1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on drawings, unlessspecifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are notlimited to, the following items.a. Wall expansion and control joints.b. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.c. Joints between different exposed materials.d. Openings below ledge angles in masonry.e. Other joints indicated below.

2. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interiorjoints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items.a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.b. Other joints indicated below.

3. Do not seal the following types of joints.a. Intentional weepholes in masonry.b. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other

type of sealing device.c. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be

sealed.d. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section.e. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls.

B. Type ___ - Exterior Joints: Use non-sag non-staining silicone sealant, unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Type ___ - Interior Joints: Use non-sag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated.2.03 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL2.04 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS

A. Type ___ - Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; notexpected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.1. Movement Capability: ______, minimum.2. Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored natural stone when tested in

accordance with ASTM C1248.3. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants.4. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.

B. Type ___ - Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single ormulti-component; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.



B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant

work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable.E. Concrete Floor Joints That Will Be Exposed in Completed Work: Test joint filler in

inconspicuous area to verify that it does not stain or discolor slab.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation ofsurfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.C. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used.D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without

getting sealant on adjacent surfaces.E. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended

temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unlessmanufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed.

F. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tapeimmediately after tooling sealant surface.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08 1113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 2 PRODUCTS1.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steel

complying with ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTMA1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel complying with ASTMA1011/A1011M, commercial steel (CS) Type B, for each.

2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.3. 4 hinges required on all doors over 36".

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with morethan one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; forinstance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with therequirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirementsconflict, comply with the most stringent.

1.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORSA. Type ___, Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated.

1. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal.B. Type ___, Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:

1. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal.C. Type ___, Fire-Rated Doors:

1. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C and NFPA252 ("positive pressure fire tests").a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR).b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.c. Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated with letter "S" on Drawings and/or Door

Schedule): Self-closing or automatic closing doors in accordance with NFPA 80 andNFPA 105, with fire-resistance-rated wall construction rated the same or greater thanthe fire-rated doors, and the following;1) Maximum Air Leakage: 3.0 cfm/sq ft of door opening at 0.10 inch w.g. pressure,

when tested in accordance with UL 1784 at both ambient and elevatedtemperatures.

2) Gasketing: Provide gasketing or edge sealing as necessary to achieve leakagelimit.

3) Label: Include the "S" label on fire-rating label of door.2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal.

1.03 HOLLOW METAL FRAMESA. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in

accordance with applicable door frame requirements.B. Exterior Door Frames: Knock-down type.

1. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Face welded type.

1. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Face welded type.

1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.E. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding

door.F. Borrowed Lites Glazing Frames: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and

as indicated on drawings.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A1008/A1008M

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A1011/A1011M




















http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%20105
























1.04 FINISHESA. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.

1.05 ACCESSORIESA. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed.B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted

corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door,

three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions.D. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.

END OF SECTION
















SECTION 08 1416FLUSH WOOD DOORS


A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood door frames.B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or

wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges withtinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS2.02 DOORS AND PANELS

A. Doors: Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements.1. 4 hinges required on all doors over 36" wide .

2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES2.04 DOOR FACINGS2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.B. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with

hardware requirements and dimensions.C. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge

clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.D. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.

2.06 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORSA. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08 3100ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS


A. Wall access door and frame units.B. Ceiling access door and frame units.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field paint finish.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.B. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of

adjoining work.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS ASSEMBLIES

A. Wall-Mounted Units:1. Size: 12 inch by 12 inch.2. Wall Mounting Criteria: Provide surface-mounted face frame and door surface flush with

frame surface.B. Fire-Rated Wall-Mounted Units:

1. Wall Fire-Rating: As indicated on drawings.2. Material: Steel.3. Size: 12 inch by 12 inch.

C. Ceiling-Mounted Units:1. Material: Steel.2. Size - Other Ceilings: 12 inch by 12 inch.

D. Fire-Rated Ceiling-Mounted Units:1. Ceiling Fire-Rating: As indicated on drawings.2. Material: Steel.3. Size: 12 inch by 12 inch.

2.02 WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED UNITSPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place.C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08 3313COILING COUNTER DOORS


A. Non-fire-rated coiling counter doors and operating hardware.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Rough openings.B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Rough openings.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.B. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature showing materials and details of

construction and finish. Include data on electrical operation.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate rough and actual opening dimensions, anchorage methods, hardware

locations, and installation details.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for thepurpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COILING COUNTER DOORS

A. Coiling Counter Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: Aluminum slat curtain.1. Mounting: Between jambs, within prepared opening.2. Nominal Slat Size: 1-1/4 inches wide.3. Slat Profile: Flat, perforated.4. Finish, Aluminum: Anodized.5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.6. Guides: Formed track; same material and finish unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Curtain Construction: Interlocking, single thickness slats.

1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and toprevent lateral movement.

2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closedposition.

3. Aluminum Slats: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), aluminum alloy Type 6063; minimumthickness 0.05 inch.

B. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place, with mounting brackets ofsame metal. 1. Aluminum Guides: Extruded aluminum channel, with wool pile runners along inside.


A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress.



C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structuralmembers only.

D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.END OF SECTION



SECTION 08 4229AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES


A. Packaged power-operated door assemblies of following types:1. Sliding type.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections.B. Section 28 1000 - Access Control: Connection to access control system; access control

devices used as actuators.C. Section 28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Connection to fire alarm system.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. BHMA A156.10 - American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; 2011.B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.C. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.D. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;

Current Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate layout and dimensions; head, jamb, and sill conditions; elevations; components,anchorage, recesses, materials, and finishes, electrical characteristics and connectionrequirements.

C. Product Data: Provide data on system components, sizes, features, and finishes.D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.1.05 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Provide two year manufacturer warranty.


A. Sliding Automatic Entrance Door Assemblies:1. ASSA ABLOY Entrance Solutions; Besam SL500: www.besam-usa.com/#sle.2. DORMA USA, Inc; ESA200: www.dorma.com/#sle.3. Stanley Access Technologies; Dura-Glide 2000 Sliding: www.stanleyaccess.com/#sle.

2.02 POWER OPERATED DOORSA. Power Operated Doors: Provide products that comply with NFPA 101 and requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction; provide equipment selected for actual door weight and for lightpedestrian traffic, unless otherwise indicated.1. Sliding and Folding Door Operators: In the event of power failure, provide for manual

open, close, and break-away operation of door leaves.2. Packaged Door Assemblies: Provide components by single manufacturer,

factory-assembled, including doors, frames, operators, actuators, and safeties.a. Finish exposed equipment components to match door and frame finish.



B. Sliding and Folding Doors with Full Power Operators: Comply with BHMA A156.10; safetiesrequired; provide break-away operation unless otherwise indicated; in the event of break-awayoperation, interrupt power operation.

2.03 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIESA. Sliding Automatic Door: Single leaf track-mounted, electric operation, extruded aluminum

glazed door, with frame, and operator concealed overhead.1. Operation: Power open, power close operation.2. Door and Frame Finish: Anodized, to be selected.


A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.END OF SECTION



SECTION 08 5113ALUMINUM WINDOWS


A. Extruded aluminum windows with fixed sash, operating sash, and infill panels.B. Factory glazing. C. Operating hardware.D. Insect screens.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Rough opening framing.B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Sealing frame to weather barrier installed on adjacent

construction.C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between window frames and adjacent

construction.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification forwindows, doors, and skylights; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, information on glass and glazing, internal

drainage details, and descriptions of hardware and accessories.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, framed opening

tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchoragelocations, _____, and installation requirements.

D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed inOwner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,

including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Aluminum Windows:1. Silver Line Building Products Corp..2. Plygem Inc..3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 WINDOWSA. Aluminum Windows: Extruded aluminum frame and sash, factory fabricated, factory finished,

with operating hardware, related flashings, and anchorage and attachment devices.1. Frame Depth: 3-1/2 inches.2. Operable Units: Double weatherstripped.3. Provide units factory glazed.



4. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted andsecured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view;reinforced as required for operating hardware and imposed loads.

5. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacentconstruction while allowing expected movement.

6. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing anddeflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

7. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network anywater entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moistureoccurring within system.

B. Fixed, Non-Operable Type:1. Construction: Thermally broken.2. Glazing: Double; clear; low-e.3. Exterior Finish: Color anodized with organic seal.

C. Horizontal Sliding Type:1. Provide screens.2. Glazing: Double; clear; low-e.3. Exterior Finish: Color anodized with organic seal.

D. Double-Hung Type:1. Provide screens.2. Glazing: Double; clear; low-e.3. Exterior Finish: Color anodized with organic seal.

2.03 HARDWAREA. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock.B. Operator: Lever action handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops.C. Pulls: Manufacturer's standard type.D. Bottom Rollers: Stainless steel, adjustable.E. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.

2.04 FINISHESA. Finish Color: As indicated on drawings.


A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receivealuminum windows.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances

and other irregularities.C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and

alignment with adjacent work.D. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack

fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermalbarrier.

E. Install operating hardware not pre-installed by manufacturer.3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.



3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08 7100DOOR HARDWARE


A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.B. Section 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2013.C. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches;

2011.D. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; 2013.E. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.F. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.H. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly

show products to be furnished for this project.C. Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use

door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operateditems and include power requirements.

1.04 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 DOOR HARDWARE SUPPLIERS

A. HagerB. SchlageC. Sargent.D. Ives.

2.02 MANUFACTURERSA. Allegion Brands; Ives or Schlage: www.allegion.com/us.B. Assa Abloy Brands; Sargent: www.assaabloydss.com.C. Hager Companies; _____: www.hagerco.com.

2.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSA. Provide door hardware specified, or as required to make doors fully functional, compliant with

applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.B. Provide items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.C. Provide products that comply with the following:

1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.2. Accessibility: ADA Standards and ICC A117.1.3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.



5. Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors, ______: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for thepurpose specified and indicated.

6. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors : Provide hardware that enables doorassembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code.

7. All doors over 36" wide require 4 hinges.D. Finishes: Provide door hardware of the same finish unless otherwise indicated.

1. Primary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D).2. Secondary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx

US26D).2.04 LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.1. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.2. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no outside trim.3. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no locking or no outside trim.B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.

1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.C. Keying: Grand master keyed.

1. Include construction keying.D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated

"push/pull" or "not required to latch".2.05 HINGES

A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers.3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.

B. Quantity of Hinges Per Door:1. Doors over 36" wide require 4 hinges.

2.06 CLOSERSA. Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4.

1. Provide surface-mounted, door-mounted closers as indicated on hardware schedule.2. On pairs of swinging doors, if an overlapping astragal is present, provide coordinator to

ensure the leaves close in proper order.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes applied to substrate are complete.D. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.E. Set exterior door thresholds with full-width bead of elastomeric sealant on each point of contact

with floor providing a continuous weather seal; anchor thresholds with stainless steelcountersunk screws.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 08 8000GLAZING


A. Glazing units.B. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed lites in doors and borrowed lites.B. Section 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS: Glazed lites in doors.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety

Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010.C. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2009.D. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008.E. GANA (LGRM) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; 2009.F. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.G. IGMA TM-3000 - North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for

Commercial & Residential Use; 1990 (2004).H. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012.I. UL 9 - Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.K. UL 263 - Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data on Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental

characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM), GANA (SM), GANA (LGRM), IGMA TM-3000,and ______ for glazing installation methods. Maintain one copy on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GLASS MATERIALSPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those forsize, squareness, and offsets at corners.

B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that mayimpede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazingsystem.



3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing

material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those inglazing referenced standards.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09 2116GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.B. Metal stud wall framing.C. Acoustic insulation.D. Cementitious backing board.E. Gypsum wallboard.F. Joint treatment and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing.B. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Building framing and sheathing.C. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.D. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation.E. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls.F. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Tile backing board.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications

for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).B. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board; 2015.C. ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board; 2004

(Reapproved 2014).D. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood

Framing; 2003 (Reapproved 2009).E. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.F. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015.G. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.H. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

I. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.

J. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and GypsumVeneer Base; 2014a.

K. ASTM C1325 - Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious BackerUnits; 2014.

L. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.M. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.N. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.




B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishingsystem.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of sizeand properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximumdeflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf.1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.3. Resilient Furring Channels: Single or double leg configuration; 1/2 inch channel depth.

B. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and propertiesnecessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALSA. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. American Gypsum Company; ____: www.americangypsum.com/#sle.2. National Gypsum Company; ____: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle.3. USG Corporation; ____: www.usg.com/#sle.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes tominimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly;

if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.3. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.

C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds.2. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels

with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 orASTM C1325.a. Thickness: 1/2 inch.b. Products:

1) USG Corporation; Durock: www.usg.com.2.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: _____ inch.

B. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 31/2 inch.

C. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unlessnoted otherwise.

D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer forproject conditions.

E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosionresistant.

F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch inThickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C1325





















A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION

A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special

friction studs. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:

1. Framed openings.2. Wall mounted cabinets.3. Plumbing fixtures.4. Toilet partitions.5. Toilet accessories.6. Wall mounted door hardware.7. Televisions8. Other owner supplied equipment.

3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATIONA. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt endjoints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements ofassembly listing.

C. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints, cut edges, and holes withwater-resistant sealant.

D. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members where indicated, inaccordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.

1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

3.07 JOINT TREATMENTA. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwiseindicated.

2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in thecompleted construction.

B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready toreceive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

END OF SECTION


















































SECTION 09 3000TILING


A. Tile for shower receptors.B. Stone thresholds.C. Ceramic accessories.D. Ceramic trim.E. Non-ceramic trim.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent construction

and fixtures.B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Tile backer board.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the

Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014.B. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a

Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999(Reaffirmed 2010).

C. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in theWet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a CuredPortland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

D. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withOrganic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised).

E. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withDry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

F. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed2010).

G. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

H. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withModified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

I. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

J. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (ExteriorGlue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

K. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded,Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed2010).

L. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance CementGrouts for Tile Installation; 2010 (Revised).

M. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2015.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.



B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.

C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Tile: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar

materials.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.1. American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com/#sle.2. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same

manufacturer as tile.B. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in

sizes coordinated with field tile.1. Manufacturers: Same as for tile.

C. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions asindicated on drawings, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive.

2.03 GROUTSA. High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.

1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout isindicated.

2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints lessthan 1/8 inch wide.

3. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Protect surrounding work from damage.B. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable

flatness tolerances.3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements ofANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB)recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align floor joints.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A108/A118/A136



D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make groutjoints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.

E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.H. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.I. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.J. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. K. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either

bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.3.05 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.END OF SECTION



SECTION 09 5100ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.B. Acoustical units.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.B. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.D. Section 28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling system.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.C. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2014.D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014.E. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling

Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth; 2015.F. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,

sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work iscompleted, tested, and approved.

B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 3 percent of total installed.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent

prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acoustic Tiles/Panels:1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; CIRRUS tegular edge: www.armstrong.com.

B. Suspension Systems:1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; ____: www.armstrong.com/#sle.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.



B. Acoustical Tile Type Cirrus: Painted mineral fiber, with the following characteristics:1. Size: As indicated by the reflected ceiling plan2. Thickness: 3/4 inches.3. Edge: Beveled tegular.4. Surface Color: White.

2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)A. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and

interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold downclips as required.

B. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type ____: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled;heavy-duty.1. Finish: White painted.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic

requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.B. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEMA. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and

manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum

deflection of 1:360.C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other

work.D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest

affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load

to exceed deflection capability.G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or

support components independently.H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function.C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.F. Cutting Acoustical Units:

1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.



2. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges.END OF SECTION



SECTION 09 6500RESILIENT FLOORING


A. Resilient sheet flooring.B. Resilient tile flooring.C. Resilient base.D. Resilient stair accessories.E. Installation accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;

2011.B. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004 (Reapproved

2014).C. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004

(Reapproved 2014).D. ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile; 2013a.E. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).F. ASTM F1913 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing; 2004

(Reapproved 2014).G. ASTM F2169 - Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads; 2015.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial

selection.D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Flooring Material: 200 square feet of each type and color.3. Extra Wall Base: 100 linear feet of each type and color.4. Extra Stair Materials: Quantity equivalent to 3 % of each type and color.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space.B. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.C. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditionsabove 55 degrees F.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHEET FLOORING

A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring - Type _____: Homogeneous without backing, with color and patternthroughout full thickness.1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1913.2. Thickness: 0.080 inch nominal.3. Sheet Width: 72 inch minimum.4. Seams: Heat welded.5. Integral coved base with cap strip.6. Pattern: as indicated on the finish schedule.

B. Welding Rod: Solid bead in material compatible with flooring, produced by flooringmanufacturer for heat welding seams, and in color matching field color.

2.02 TILE FLOORINGA. Vinyl Composition Tile - Type ____: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness.

1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to typespecified.

2. Size: 12 by 12 inch.3. Thickness: 0.125 inch.4. Pattern: As indicated on the finish schedule.5. Manufacturers:

a. Tarkett.2.03 STAIR COVERING

A. Stair Treads: Rubber; full width and depth of stair tread in one piece; tapered thickness.1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F2169, Type TS, rubber, vulcanized

thermoset.2. Nosing: Square.

B. Stair Risers: Full height and width of tread in one piece, matching treads in material and color.1. Thickness: 0.080 inch.

C. Stair Stringers: Full height in one piece and in maximum available lengths, matching treads inmaterial and color.1. Nominal Thickness: 0.080 inch.

2.04 RESILIENT BASEA. Resilient Base - Type ____: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style

B, Cove.1. Height: 4 inch.2. Thickness: 0.125 inch.3. Finish: Satin.4. Color: as indicated on the finish schedule.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring

manufacturer.C. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.


A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks thatmight telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.



B. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilientflooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - SHEET FLOORINGA. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum

number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns atseams.

B. Seams are prohibited in bathrooms, toilet rooms, and custodial closets.C. Seal seams by heat welding where indicated.D. Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall

junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal capstrip.

3.04 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORINGA. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless

otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions.3.05 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use

premolded units.C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

3.06 INSTALLATION - STAIR COVERINGSA. Install stair coverings in one piece for full width and depth of tread.B. Install stringers configured tightly to stair profile.C. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely.

3.07 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 09 6816CARPETING


A. Carpet, direct-glued.B. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 6813 - Tile Carpeting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor

Covering Materials; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).B. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2014c.C. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet; 2015.D. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.C. Samples: Submit two samples ____by____ inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each

carpet and cushion material specified.D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional requirements.2. Extra Carpet: 3% sq ft of each type, color, and pattern installed.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours

after installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CARPET

A. Carpet, Type ____: Tufted, nylon.1. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with

ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.2. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test").3. Color: Asindicated on the finish schedule.4. Gage: 1/8 inch.5. Stitches: 6.8 per inch.6. Pile Weight: 32 oz/sq yd.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.B. Adhesives:C. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by carpet manufacturer.D. Carpet Adhesive: Recommended by carpet manufacturer; releasable type.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E648














A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive carpet.

B. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooringinstallation by testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH).1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104

(Commercial).C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.D. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings.

1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to maintraffic.

2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent

pieces.4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.

E. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.3.03 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET

A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.

B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficientopen time, press carpet into adhesive.

C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seamstraight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.

D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION









































SECTION 09 9000PAINTING AND COATING


A. Surface preparation.B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and

unless otherwise indicated.1. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated andexposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, andelectrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment.5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.6. Glass.7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;

2014.C. SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective

Coatings; Fourth Edition.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for

each:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category

(e.g. "alkyd enamel").2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of

each system.C. Samples: Submit two paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range

of colors available for each finishing product specified.1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.2. All colors and finishes shall be approved by the Architect.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.



1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.


A. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extentpossible.

B. Paints:1. Duron, Inc: www.duron.com/#sle.2. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com/#sle.3. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL

A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and

uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from asingle production run.

3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedureis specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of topcoats; where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primercategorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the

following:a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings.2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water addedat project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As indicated on drawings or approved by the Architect.1. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the

wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR

A. Paint WE-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; _____.

B. Paint CE-OP-3L - Masonry/Concrete, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of block filler.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; ____.

C. Paint GE-OP-3A - Gypsum Board and Plaster, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.2. Flat: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ____.

D. Paint ME-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov



1. One coat of alkyd primer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ____.

2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIORA. Paint WI-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:

1. One coat alkyd primer sealer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ___________________.

B. Paint CI-OP-3L - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of block filler.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; ____.

C. Paint MI-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:1. One coat of alkyd primer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ____.

D. Paint GI-OP-3LA - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex-Acrylic, 3 Coat:1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex-acrylic enamel; ___________________.3. Eggshell: Two coats of latex-acrylic enamel; ___________________.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding

materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specificallyindicated or not; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.


A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially affect proper application.C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

3.03 APPLICATIONA. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical

components and paint separately.B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is

applied.D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat.F. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed

prior to finishing.

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov



3.04 CLEANINGA. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and

remove daily from site.3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov



SECTION 10 2601WALL AND CORNER GUARDS


A. Corner guards.B. Corridor handrails.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Blocking for wall and corner guard anchors.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in

measurements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wall and Corner Guards:1. Inpro: www.inprocorp.com.

2.02 COMPONENTSA. Corridor Handrails: Factory- or shop-fabricated, with preformed end caps and internal and

external corners:1. Color: As scheduled.

B. Corner Guards - Surface Mounted: High impact vinyl with extruded aluminum full heightretainer .1. Width of Wings: 2 inches.2. Corner: Square.3. Color: As indicated.4. Length: One piece.5. Preformed end caps.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.B. Pre-drill holes for attachment.C. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth.


A. Verify that rough openings, concealed blocking, and anchors are correctly sized and located.B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured

rigidly in position to wall framing members only.END OF SECTION



SECTION 10 2800TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES


A. Commercial toilet accessories.B. Commercial shower and bath accessories.C. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, tubs, residential bathrooms, and utility rooms.D. Utility room accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section ____-___________: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and

plates.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless

Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015.C. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus

Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2011.D. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and

attachment methods.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Commercial Toilet, Shower, and Bath Accessories:1. Bobrick.2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FINISHESA. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted.B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, polished finish, unless otherwise noted.

2.03 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIESA. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, stainless steel, spindleless

type for tension spring delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll.B. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 1/4 inch thick annealed float glass; ASTM C1036.

2.04 COMMERCIAL SHOWER AND BATH ACCESSORIESA. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inch wall thickness,

satin-finished, with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin-finished stainlesssteel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners.

2.05 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIESA. Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped channel.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.



3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on

drawings.B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Grab Bars: As indicated on drawings.END OF SECTION



SECTION 10 4400FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES


A. Fire extinguishers.B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.B. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.


A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co; Model FS C3216-RL Clear white letters cabinet with 10 lb.

ABC extinguisher: www.larsensmfg.com.2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicablecodes, whichever is more stringent.

2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETSA. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type.B. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, color as selected.C. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White colored enamel.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings.C. Install within height limits prescribed by NFPA 10.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 10 5723CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING


A. Wall mounted wire closet shelving.B. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Blocking in walls for attachment of shelving.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHELVING APPLICATIONS

A. Shelf Depth: 16 inches, unless otherwise indicated.2.02 MATERIALS

A. Wire Shelving: Factory-assembled coated wire mesh shelf assemblies for wall-mounting, withall components and connections required to produce a rigid structure that is free of buckling andwarping.1. Standard Mesh Shelves: Cross deck wires spaced at 1 inch.

B. Mounting Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting hardware; include supportbraces, wall brackets, back clips, end clips, poles, and other accessories as required forcomplete and secure installation; factory finished to match shelving.

C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting substrates.END OF SECTION



SECTION 12 3600COUNTERTOPS


A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work.B. Countertops for manufactured casework.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ISFA 2-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2013.B. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Specimen warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings ofcabinets and casework specified in other sections.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer'sfull range of available colors and patterns.

E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limitsrecommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products underenvironmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COUNTERTOPS

A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) sheet bonded tosubstrate.1. Laminate Sheet, Type ___: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness.

a. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.b. Surface Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.

2. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.B. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous

substrate.1. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISFA 2-01 and NEMA

LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous andcapable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surfacecoating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.a. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.b. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.

2. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.3. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high.

2.02 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against

cabinet or wall.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20LD%203














3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned orunnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.

B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwiseindicated.1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof

glue.2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;shim where required.

B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate boardof 5/8 inch.

C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.END OF SECTION

























SECTION 21 0500COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION


A. Pipe, fittings, sleeves, escutcheons, seals, and connections for sprinkler systems.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and FusingQualifications; 2015.

B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2013a.C. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)

Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2015.D. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 80; 2013.E. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic

Pipe (SDR-PR); 2013.F. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2014.G. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; 2016.H. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; 2013.I. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall

penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, andpiping connections.

D. Submit Drawings and Calculations to Authority having Jurisdiction for approval.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to UL, FM, and Warnock Hersey requirements.B. Valves: Bear UL, FM, and Warnock Hersey label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and

pressure rating marked on valve body.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

A. Sprinkler Systems: Comply with NFPA 13.B. Standpipe and Hose Systems: Comply with NFPA 14.C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Comply with ASME BPVC-IX.

2.02 ABOVE GROUND PIPINGA. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F442/F442M, SDR 13.5.

1. Fittings: ASTM F438 Schedule 40, or ASTM F439 schedule 80, CPVC.2. Joints: Solvent welded, using ASTM F493 cement.

2.03 PIPE SLEEVESA. Vertical Piping:



1. Sleeve Length: 1 inch above finished floor.2. Provide sealant for watertight joint.


A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance withNFPA 13.

B. Install standpipe piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 14.C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.D. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.G. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacentwork.

2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe

movement without disengagement of supported pipe.4. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of

connected horizontal piping.5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers.H. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top

of pipe level.I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support

members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat ofzinc rich primer to welding.

J. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.K. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, walls, and partitions and seal pipe and sleeve

penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.1. All Rated Openings: Caulk tight with fire stopping material complying with ASTM E814 in

accordance with Section 07 8400 to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases.L. Escutcheons:

1. Install and firmly attach escutcheons at piping penetrations into finished spaces.2. Provide escutcheons on both sides of partitions separating finished areas through which

piping passes.3. Use chrome plated escutcheons in occupied spaces and to conceal openings in

construction.M. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are

compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

N. Sprinkler heads are to be centered in ceiling tiles ( see reflected ceiling plan).END OF SECTION









































SECTION 22 1005PLUMBING PIPING


A. Pipe, pipe fittings, specialties, and connections for piping systems.1. Sanitary sewer.2. Domestic water.3. Storm water.4. Flanges, unions, and couplings.5. Pipe hangers and supports.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2011.B. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.C. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013.D. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; 2011.E. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings -

DWV; 2012.F. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; 2014.G. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.H. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2015.I. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and

Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2015.J. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).K. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2015a.L. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014.M. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013.N. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 2013.O. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and

Copper Alloy Tube; 2010.P. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper

Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).Q. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings;

2014.R. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules

40, 80, and 120; 2015.S. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe

(SDR Series); 2015.T. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,

Schedule 40; 2013.U. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Piping Systems; 2012.V. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and

Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014.



W. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2014.

X. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).

Y. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipeand Fittings; 2015.

Z. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2015.

AA. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2015.

AB. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic PipeFittings, Schedule 80; 2013.

AC. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) PlasticPipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2013.

AD. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) PlasticPipe (SDR-PR); 2013.

AE. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe;2010.

AF. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2014.

AG. ASTM F679 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter PlasticGravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2015.

AH. ASTM F876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing; 2013a.AI. ASTM F877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and

Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2011.AJ. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2010.AK. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2012.AL. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast; 2009.AM. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and

Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; 2009.AN. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe

and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; 2011.AO. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,

Application, and Installation; 2009.AP. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).AQ. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.AR. PPI TR-4 - PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Hydrostatic Design Stress (HDS),

Strength Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum Required Strength(MRS) Ratings For Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe; 2013.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide

manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), thatcomply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDINGA. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV.1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper.2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, ASTM D3034, or ASTM F679.1. Fittings: PVC.2. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F477 elastomeric gaskets.

2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.

B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785 Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241 SDR 26 with not less than 150 psipressure rating.1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC.2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDINGA. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.

B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.1. Fittings: Ductile or gray iron, standard thickness.2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or vulcanized SBR gasket

with 3/4 inch diameter rods.2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H).1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.

B. CPVC Pipe: ASTM D2846/D2846M, ASTM F441/F441M, or ASTM F442/F442M.1. Fittings: CPVC; ASTM D2846/D2846M, ASTM F437, ASTM F438, or ASTM F439.2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement.

C. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe: ASTM F876 or ASTM F877.1. PPI TR-4 Pressure Design Basis:

a. 100 psig at maximum 180 degrees F.2.06 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, ASTM D3034, or ASTM F679.



1. Fittings: PVC.2. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F477 elastomeric gaskets.

2.07 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.

1. Fittings: PVC.2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.08 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDINGA. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.

1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded.3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil

polyethylene tape.2.09 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME B31.1.

2.10 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGSA. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end,

water impervious isolation barrier.2.11 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate

type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze

hangers.3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.


A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified

solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying withNSF 61 and NSF 372.

C. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.END OF SECTION

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NSF%2061





SECTION 22 1006PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES


A. Drains.B. Cleanouts.C. Hydrants.D. Washing machine boxes and valves.E. Refrigerator valve and recessed box.F. Backflow preventers.G. Double check valve assemblies.H. Mixing valves.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; 2009.B. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Principle

Fire Protection Backflow Preventers; 2011.C. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Wall Hydrant with Backflow Protection and Freeze

Resistance; 2011.D. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).E. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 andNSF 372 for maximum lead content.

2.02 DRAINSA. Roof Drains:

1. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump.2. Strainer: Removable polyethylene dome with vandal proof screws.

2.03 CLEANOUTSA. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas (CO-1):

1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-3):

1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded topassembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketeddepressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.

C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-4):1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and

round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.2.04 HYDRANTS

A. Wall Hydrants:1. ASSE 1019; freeze resistant, self-draining type with chrome plated wall plate hose thread

spout, handwheel, and integral vacuum breaker.






















2.05 WASHING MACHINE BOXES AND VALVESA. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass long shank valves with wheel handles,

socket for 2 inch waste, slip in finishing cover.2.06 REFRIGERATOR VALVE AND RECESSED BOX

A. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass valves with wheel handle, slip infinishing cover.

2.07 BACKFLOW PREVENTERSA. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:

1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; twoindependently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressurerelief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under backpressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gatevalves, strainer, and four test cocks.

2.08 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIESA. Manufacturers:B. Double Check Valve Assemblies:

1. ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs;two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.

2.09 MIXING VALVESA. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:

1. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integraltemperature adjustment.

END OF SECTION





























SECTION 23 0513COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT


A. General construction and requirements.B. Applications.C. Single phase electric motors.D. Three phase electric motors.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators;

2004.B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection

requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Construction:1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.2. Design for continuous operation in 104 degrees F environment.3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class,

service factor, and motor enclosure type.B. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps,

locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, powerfactor, efficiency.

C. Wiring Terminations:1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials

indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded

conduit connection in end frame.2.02 APPLICATIONS2.03 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS2.04 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS

A. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design Bcharacteristics.

B. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Comply with NEMA MG 1 for Design Bmotors.

C. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free fromelectrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.

D. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets ofcast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.



E. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors embeddedin motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter;refer to Section 26 2913.

F. Nominal Efficiency: As indicated at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance withIEEE 112.

G. Nominal Power Factor: As indicated at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordancewith IEEE 112.

END OF SECTION

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=IEEE%20112






SECTION 23 0553IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


A. Nameplates.B. Tags.C. Ceiling tacks.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2007.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.B. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.C. Control Panels: Nameplates.D. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling.E. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.F. Instrumentation: Tags.G. Pumps: Nameplates.H. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.I. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.

2.02 NAMEPLATES2.03 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smoothedges.

2.04 CEILING TACKSA. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 23 0593TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC


A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 2100 - Allowances: Inspection and testing allowances.B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Employment of testing agency and payment for

services.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AABC (NSTSB) - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, 7th Edition; 2016.B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC

Systems; 2008.C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental

Systems; 2015, Eighth Edition.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Installer Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for

approval within 30 days after award of Contract.C. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be

followed and the specific approach for each system and component.1. Submit to Architect.2. Include at least the following in the plan:

a. Preface: An explanation of the intended use of the control system.b. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency

measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures,parameters, formulas to be used.

c. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recentcalibration date.

d. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and pipingdrawings during the process.

e. Final test report forms to be used.f. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.

D. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, andbalancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final

copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.3. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report

format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.4. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.5. Include the following on the title page of each report:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.d. Project name.e. Project location.f. Project Architect.



g. Project Engineer.h. Project Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:1. AABC (NSTSB), AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.

B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete workprior to Substantial Completion of the project.

C. TAB Agency Qualifications:1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this

section.2. Certified by one of the following:

a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabc.com/#sle; upon completion submitAABC National Performance Guaranty.

D. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency.END OF SECTION



SECTION 23 0713DUCT INSULATION


A. Duct insulation.B. Duct liner.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.B. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and

Sound Absorbing Material); 2012.B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.C. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and

thickness for each service, and locations.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification,including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanicaldamage, by storing in original wrapping.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.02 DUCT LINERA. Glass Fiber Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C1071;

flexible blanket, rigid board, and preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edgescoated with poly vinyl acetate polymer, acrylic polymer, or black composite.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 23 2300REFRIGERANT PIPING


A. Piping.B. Refrigerant.C. Moisture and liquid indicators.D. Valves.E. Strainers.F. Check valves.G. Filter-driers.H. Expansion valves.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers; 2009.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PIPING2.02 REFRIGERANT2.03 VALVES2.04 STRAINERS2.05 FILTER-DRIERS

A. Performance:1. Flow Capacity - Liquid Line: ____ ton, minimum, rated in accordance with AHRI 710.2. Pressure Drop: 2 psi, maximum, when operating at full connected evaporator capacity.3. Design Working Pressure: 350 psi, minimum.

B. Cores: Molded or loose-fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant, activatedalumina, activated charcoal, and filtration to 40 microns, with secondary filtration to 20 microns;of construction that will not pass into refrigerant lines.

C. Construction: UL listed.1. Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 23 3100HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS


A. Metal ductwork.B. Kitchen hood ductwork.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.B. Section 11 4000 - Foodservice Equipment: Supply of kitchen range hoods for placement by this

Section.C. Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.D. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories.E. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2013.B. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.C. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking

Operations; 2014.D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.E. SMACNA (KVS) - Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication and

Installation Guidelines; 2001.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES

A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to comply with NFPA 90A standards.2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.B. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;

maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergencedownstream.

D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).2.03 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A. Flat Oval Ducts: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct.1. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).2. Fittings: Manufacture at least two gages heavier metal than duct.3. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

2.04 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORKA. Fabricate in accordance with ductwork manufacturer's installation instructions, SMACNA (DCS),

SMACNA (KVS), and NFPA 96.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&input_doc_number=smacna&item_s_key=00391885&item_key_date=981231&input_doc_number=smacna&input_doc_title=kitchen%20ventilation




A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and

maintenance activities.END OF SECTION














SECTION 23 3300AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES


A. Combination fire and smoke dampers.B. Fire dampers.C. Smoke dampers.D. Volume control dampers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.B. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.B. NFPA 92 - Standard for Smoke Control Systems; 2015.C. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking

Operations; 2014.D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.E. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.F. UL 555S - Standard for Smoke Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.

Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S, and as indicated.2.02 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated.2.03 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated.2.04 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and followSMACNA (DCS). Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locationsindicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required byAuthorities Having Jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves,breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

C. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SMACNA%20HVAC%20DUCT%20CONSTR








D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.E. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately

adjacent to the equipment.END OF SECTION










SECTION 23 3416CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS


A. Backward inclined centrifugal fans.B. Bearings and drives.C. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation.B. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; 2015.B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; 2010.C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance

Rating; 2007.D. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; 2014.E. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; 2014.F. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014.G. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with

specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet andoutlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves withspecified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at ratedcapacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Permanent fans may not be used for ventilation during construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BEARINGS AND DRIVES

A. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, selfgreasing ball bearings, with ABMA STD 9 life at50,000 hours.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Discharge Dampers: Parallel blade heavy duty steel damper assembly with blades constructed

of two plates formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, withblades linked out of air stream to single control lever.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork; refer to Section 23 3300.

Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductworkand fan while running.



C. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated; refer to Section 233300.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 23 3423HVAC POWER VENTILATORS


A. Roof exhausters.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 22 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment.B. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AMCA (DIR) - (Directory of) Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings

Program; http://www.amca.org/certified/search/company.aspx.B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; 2010.C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance

Rating; 2007.D. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; 2014.E. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; 2014.F. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014.G. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking

Operations; 2014.H. UL 705 - Power Ventilators; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified

operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electricalcharacteristics and connection requirements.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Permanent ventilators may not be used for ventilation during construction.


A. Greenheck: www.greenheck.com.B. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com.C. PennBarry: www.pennbarry.com.

2.02 POWER VENTILATORS - GENERALA. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA

Certified Rating Seal.B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bearing AMCA Certified Sound Rating

Seal.C. Fabrication: Comply with AMCA 99.D. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with

UL 705.E. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20705






A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhausters.C. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated.

END OF SECTION












SECTION 23 3700AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS


A. Diffusers.B. Registers/grilles.C. Louvers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; 2012.B. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; 2006 (R2011).

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as

to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inletsshowing type, size, location, application, and noise level.


A. Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.hartandcooley.com.B. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com.C. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com.D. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.

2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERSA. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.03 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLESA. Construction: Made of aluminum extrusions with factory enamel finish.B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.04 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLESA. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch

minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminumextrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

B. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.2.05 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inchminimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminumextrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

B. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.2.06 LOUVERS

A. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conformwith architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 23 8101TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS


A. Unit heaters.B. Radiant heaters.C. Electric heaters.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

Installation of room thermostats. Electrical supply to units.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements.C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit schedules of equipment and enclosures typically indicating length and number ofpieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors,pilaster covers, and comparison of specified heat required to actual heat output provided.

D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner'sname and registered with manufacturer.

1.04 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturers warranty for fan-coil unit.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Trane Inc: www.trane.com.2. Qmark

B. Coils: Seamless copper tubing, silver brazed to steel headers, and with evenly spacedaluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubing.

C. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of color as selected.D. Control: Local disconnect switch.

2.02 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Marley Engineered Products; Model ______: www.marleymep.com/#sle.B. Assembly: UL listed and labelled, with thermal box and cover, and built-in controls.C. Ceiling Panels: aluminum pans, manufacturer's standard white finish; manufactured and

assembled to configuration indicated.2.03 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Marley Engineered Products: www.marleymep.com.2. Trane Inc: www.trane.com.3. Qmark.





B. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceiling are finished and painted. Donot damage equipment or finishes.

C. Unit Heaters: Hang from building structure, with pipe hangers anchored to building, not frompiping. Mount as high as possible to maintain greatest headroom unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install electric heating equipment including devices furnished by manufacturer but notfactory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal. Install electricalwiring in accordance with manufacturer's submittals and Section 26 0583.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 23 8113PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS


A. Air conditioning units.B. Cabinet.C. Evaporator fan.D. Compressor.E. Evaporator coil.F. Condenser.G. Heating coil.H. Air filters.I. Controls.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014.B. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for manufactured products and assemblies. Indicate water, drain,

thermostatic valves, and electrical rough-in connections with electrical characteristics andconnection requirements.


A. Amana.B. FreidrichC. GE

2.02 AIR CONDITIONING UNITSA. Description: Packaged, self-contained, factory assembled, prewired unit, consisting of cabinet,

compressor, condensing coil, evaporator fan, evaporator coil, outside air connection, heatingcoil, air filters, and controls; fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.

B. Assembly: Horizontal flow air delivery, in draw-through configuration as indicated.2.03 CABINET

A. Frame and Panels: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed access doors orpanels with quick fasteners.

B. Insulation: Minimum 1/2 inch thick acoustic duct liner for lining cabinet interior.C. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating.

2.04 EVAPORATOR FAN2.05 COMPRESSOR

A. Hermetically sealed, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication andinternal motor protection.



2.06 EVAPORATOR COILA. Direct expansion coiling coil of seamless copper or aluminum tubes expanded into aluminum

fins.B. Refrigeration circuit with externally equalized thermal expansion valve, filter-drier, and charging

valves.2.07 CONDENSER

A. Fan: Double width, double inlet, forward curved centrifugal fan, statically and dynamicallybalanced, with permanently lubricated bearings.

2.08 HEATING COILA. Helical nickel-chrome resistance wire coil heating elements with refractory ceramic support

bushings, with automatic reset thermal cut-out, built-in magnetic contactors, manual resetthermal cut-out, airflow proving device, load fuses.

2.09 AIR FILTERS2.10 CONTROLS

A. Factory wired controls shall include contactor, high and low pressure cutouts, internal windingthermostat for compressor, control circuit transformer, non-cycling reset relay.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.END OF SECTION


JONES & JONES ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS PC 23 8126.13-1

SECTION 23 8126.13SMALL-CAPACITY SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS


A. Controls.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-SourceHeat Pump Equipment; 2008.

B. ASHRAE Std 23.1 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement RefrigerantCompressors and Condensing Units; 2010.

C. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.D. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems;

2015.E. UL 207 - Standard for Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical;

Current Edition, Including All Revisions.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Split-System Heating and Cooling Units: Self-contained, packaged, matchedfactory-engineered and assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed. 1. Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor units, factory

cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line.B. Performance Requirements: See Drawings for additional requirements.

2.02 OUTDOOR UNITSA. Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, with compressor

and condenser.1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in accordance

with ASHRAE Std 23.1 and UL 207.B. Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch (automatic

reset), service valves and gauge ports, thermometer well (in liquid line).1. Provide thermostatic expansion valves.

C. Operating Controls:1. Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of local authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 0519LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


A. Single conductor building wire.B. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable.C. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable.D. Metal-clad cable.E. Wiring connectors.F. Electrical tape.G. Heat shrink tubing.H. Oxide inhibiting compound.I. Wire pulling lubricant.J. Cable ties.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for

grounding conductors and grounding connectors.C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical

Purposes; 2010 (Reapproved 2014).D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper

Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).E. ASTM B800 - Standard Specification for 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Electrical

Purposes - Annealed and Intermediate Tempers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).F. ASTM B801 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Conductors of 8000 Series

Aluminum Alloy Wire for Subsequent Covering of Insulation; 2007 (Reapproved 2012).G. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic

Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010.H. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically

Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2013.I. FS A-A-59544 - Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation); Federal Specification;

Revision A, 2008.J. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.K. NECA 104 - Recommended Practice for Installing Aluminum Building Wire and Cable; 2012.L. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); 2012.M. NECA 121 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Type NM-B) and Underground

Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable (Type UF); 2007.N. NEMA WC 70 - Nonshielded Power Cable 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical

Energy; 2009.



O. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;2013.

P. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority HavingJurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

Q. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.R. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.S. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.T. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.U. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.V. UL 493 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cables; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.W. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.X. UL 719 - Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.Y. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under othersections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductorsizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate the installation of direct burial cable with other trades to avoid conflicts withpiping or other potential conflicts.

3. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminationssuitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtaindirection before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors

and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, andavailable sizes, configurations, and stranding.

C. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductorssubstituted for copper conductors. Include proposed modifications to raceways, boxes, wiringgutters, enclosures, etc. to accommodate substituted conductors.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower

than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installationbelow this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceedingwith work.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 andproduct listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,permitted, or required.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is permitted only as follows: as allowed by code.1. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:

a. Where exposed to view.b. Where exposed to damage.c. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations.

D. Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:

a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxesto luminaires.

b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and under raisedfloors for branch circuits up to 20 A.

2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.b. Where exposed to damage.c. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as

suitable for those locations.d. For isolated ground circuits, unless provided with an additional isolated/insulated

grounding conductor.e. For patient care areas of health care facilities requiring redundant grounding and is

HFC rated.2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation.D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,

connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.E. Comply with NEMA WC 70.F. Comply with FS A-A-59544 where applicable.G. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.H. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.I. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526.J. Conductors and Cables Installed in Cable Tray: Listed and labeled as suitable for cable tray

use.K. Conductors and Cables Installed Where Exposed to Direct Rays of Sun: Listed and labeled as

sunlight resistant.L. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air (only where

specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return airplenums.

M. Conductor Material:1. Provide copper conductors except where aluminum conductors are specifically indicated

or permitted for substitution. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper unlessspecifically indicated as aluminum. Conductors designated with the abbreviation "AL"indicate aluminum.



a. Substitution of aluminum conductors for copper is permitted, when approved byOwner and authority having jurisdiction, only for the following:1) Services: Copper conductors size 1/0 AWG and larger.2) Feeders: Copper conductors size 1/0 AWG and larger.

b. Where aluminum conductors are substituted for copper, comply with the following:1) Size aluminum conductors to provide, when compared to copper sizes indicated,

equivalent or greater ampacity and equivalent or less voltage drop.2) Increase size of raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. as required to

accommodate aluminum conductors.3) Provide aluminum equipment grounding conductor sized according to NFPA 70.

2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copperconductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwiseindicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.4. Aluminum Conductors (only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution):

AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors recognized by ASTM B800 and compactstranded in accordance with ASTM B801 unless otherwise indicated.

N. Minimum Conductor Size:1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.

O. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

P. Conductor Color Coding:1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having

jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.

a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinylcolor coding electrical tape.

3. Color Code:a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:

1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.

b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

c. 240/120 V High-Leg Delta, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B (High-Leg): Orange.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

d. 240/120 V, 1 Phase, 3 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Neutral/Grounded: White.

e. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.f. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe.g. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink.h. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color

code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authorityhaving jurisdiction.

i. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.



2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIREA. Manufacturers:

1. Copper Building Wire:a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.E. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2.b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.c. Fixture Wiring Within Luminaires: Type TFFN/TFN for luminaires with labeled

maximum temperature of 90 degrees C; Approved suitable type for luminaires withlabeled maximum temperature greater than 90 degrees C.

2. Aluminum Building Wire (only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution): Type XHHW-2.

2.04 NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLEA. Manufacturers:

1. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type NM multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying withUL 719, Type NM-B.

C. Conductor Stranding:1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.2.05 UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE

A. Manufacturers:1. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type UF multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying withUL 493, Type UF-B.

C. Provide equipment grounding conductor unless otherwise indicated.D. Conductor Stranding:

1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

E. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.2.06 METAL-CLAD CABLE

A. Manufacturers:





















1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle.2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listedfor use in classified firestop systems to be used.

C. Conductor Stranding:1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.E. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.F. Provide oversized neutral conductors where indicated or required.G. Provide dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor where indicated or required.H. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.I. Armor: Aluminum or steel, interlocked tape.J. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of

installed location.2.07 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with theconductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C asapplicable.

B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 0526.C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:

1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression

connectors.3. Connectors for Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors.

D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations

designed for terminal lugs.2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with

mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can

accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not lessthan required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

4. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitatedisconnection.

5. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compressionconnectors where connectors are required.

6. Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors for all connections.7. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connections

to terminal screws.8. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.

E. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use withconductors without stripping insulation.

F. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applicationsand 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed ascomplying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.

G. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.1. Manufacturers:
























































a. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

H. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.1. Manufacturers:

a. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

I. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable forconnection to be made.1. Manufacturers:

a. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

2.08 WIRING ACCESSORIESA. Electrical Tape:

1. Manufacturers:a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.b. Plymouth Rubber Europa: www.plymouthrubber.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listedas complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion,and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

3. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying withUL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight;conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperatureenvironment up to 221 degrees F.

4. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying withASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperatureenvironment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.

5. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.

6. Varnished Cambric Electrical Tape: Cotton cambric fabric tape, with or without adhesive,oil-primed and coated with high-grade insulating varnish; minimum thickness of 7 mil;suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

7. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible,all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.

B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V;suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to beinstalled.1. Manufacturers:

a. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle.b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed andsuitable for use at the installation temperature.1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.


























































b. American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com/#sle.c. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to

accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Circuiting Requirements:

1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing

required.3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location

indicated.5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and

power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as

separate, combining them together in a single raceway is permitted, under the followingconditions:a. Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated

neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors.b. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating.c. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors.

8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductorsamong up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the sameraceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individualbranch circuit.

9. Provide oversized neutral/grounded conductors where indicated and as specified below.a. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders fed from K-rated transformers.b. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders serving panelboards with 200 percent

rated neutral bus.B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).D. Install aluminum conductors in accordance with NECA 104.E. Install nonmetallic-sheathed cable (Type NM-B) in accordance with NECA 121.F. Install underground feeder and branch-circuit cable (Type UF-B) in accordance with NECA 121.G. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.H. Installation in Raceway:

1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and othercontaminants.























































2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum

pulling tension and sidewall pressure.4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not

recommended by the manufacturer.I. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same

manner.J. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports

and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support frombuilding structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

K. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):

a. Use listed fittings.b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or

insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.c. Do not use direct-bearing set-screw type fittings for cables with aluminum armor.

L. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.M. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment

enclosures.N. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded

conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.O. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or makesplices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections withoutcutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,

oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.5. Connections for Aluminum Conductors: Fill connectors with oxide inhibiting compound

where not pre-filled by manufacturer.6. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.7. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools

and dies.P. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for

the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unsplicedconductors.1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical

tape, or heat shrink tubing.a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape

or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical

tape, or heat shrink tubing.a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing

electrical tape.b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer

covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.

Q. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
























































R. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrallycolored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns oftape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

S. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 0553.T. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.U. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and

devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test

is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is notrequired.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.END OF SECTION






















SECTION 26 0526GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Grounding and bonding requirements.B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.D. Ground bars.E. Ground rod electrodes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional

requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.C. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting: Additional grounding and bonding requirements for

pole-mounted luminaires.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth SurfacePotentials of a Grounding System; 2012.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2007.D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.F. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities Code; 2015.G. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; 2014.H. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with

specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode.3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to bereused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity areverified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,

connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a completegrounding and bonding system.



D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

E. Grounding System Resistance:1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless

otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does notconstitute normally dry conditions.

2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested accordingto IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.

3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, SystemNeutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested using"point-to-point" methods.

F. Grounding Electrode System:1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form

grounding electrode system.a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical

damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end withbonding jumper.

2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where

present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feetat an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to thebuilding.

b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipeelectrically continuous.

c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal ofmeter without disconnecting jumper.

3. Metal In-Ground Support Structure:a. Provide connection to metal in-ground support structure that is in direct contact with

earth in accordance with NFPA 70.4. Concrete-Encased Electrode:

a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feetof either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWGembedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth inaccordance with NFPA 70.

5. Ground Rod Electrode(s):a. Provide three electrodes in an equilateral triangle configuration unless otherwise

indicated or required.b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other ground

electrode.c. Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s) at least 5 feet outside building

perimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance; wherepossible, locate in softscape (uncovered) area.

6. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified groundingelectrode system resistance.

7. Ground Riser: Provide common grounding electrode conductor not less than 3/0 AWG fortap connections to multiple separately derived systems as permitted in NFPA 70.

G. Service-Supplied System Grounding:1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral

(grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated,make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure.

2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded)bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any other



connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of servicedisconnect.

H. Grounding for Separate Building or Structure Supplied by Feeder(s) or Branch Circuits:1. Provide grounding electrode system for each separate building or structure.2. Provide equipment grounding conductor routed with supply conductors.3. For each disconnecting means, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect

equipment ground bus to grounding electrode system.4. Do not make any connections and remove any factory-installed jumpers between neutral

(grounded) conductors and ground.I. Separately Derived System Grounding:

1. Separately derived systems include, but are not limited to:a. Transformers (except autotransformers such as buck-boost transformers).b. Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), when configured as separately derived

systems.2. Provide grounding electrode conductor to connect derived system grounded conductor to

nearest effectively grounded metal building frame. Unless otherwise indicated, makeconnection at neutral (grounded) bus in source enclosure.

3. Provide bonding jumper to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest metalbuilding frame and nearest metal water piping in the area served by the derived system,where not already used as a grounding electrode for the derived system. Make connectionat same location as grounding electrode conductor connection.

4. Outdoor Source: Where the source of the separately derived system is located outside thebuilding or structure supplied, provide connection to grounding electrode at source inaccordance with NFPA 70.

5. Provide system bonding jumper to connect system grounded conductor to equipmentground bus. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductorconnection. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductorsand ground on load side of separately derived system disconnect.

6. Where the source and first disconnecting means are in separate enclosures, providesupply-side bonding jumper between source and first disconnecting means.

J. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic

equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, andother normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electricalconductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance withNFPA 70.

2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuitraceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipmentgrounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuitequipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipmentground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided toaccommodate conduit movement.

7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. Thisincludes, but is not limited to:a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water

pipe used as grounding electrode.b. Metal gas piping.c. Metal process piping.

8. Provide redundant grounding and bonding for patient care areas of health care facilities inaccordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 99.






















K. Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding:1. Provide intersystem bonding termination at service equipment or metering equipment

enclosure and at disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures inaccordance with NFPA 70.

2. Provide bonding jumper in raceway from intersystem bonding termination to eachcommunications room or backboard and provide ground bar for termination.a. Bonding Jumper Size: 6 AWG, unless otherwise indicated or required.b. Raceway Size: 3/4 inch trade size unless otherwise indicated or required.c. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.d. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise

indicated.L. Pole-Mounted Luminaires: Also comply with Section 26 5600.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTSA. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526:1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions:1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with

earth.2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in

raceway).2. Factory Pre-fabricated Bonding Jumpers: Furnished with factory-installed ferrules; size

braided cables to provide equivalent gage of specified conductors.C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductorsand items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground,concealed and other inaccessible connections.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, orexothermic welded connections for accessible connections.a. Exceptions:

1) Use exothermic welded connections for connections to metal building frame.4. Manufacturers - Mechanical and Compression Connectors:

a. Harger Lightning & Grounding; __________: www.harger.com/#sle.b. Thomas & Betts Corporation; ______: www.tnb.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

5. Manufacturers - Exothermic Welded Connections:a. Cadweld, a brand of Erico International Corporation; __________:

www.erico.com/#sle.b. thermOweld, subsidiary of Continental Industries; division of Burndy LLC;

__________: www.thermoweld.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Ground Bars:1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.2. Size: As indicated.3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.4. Manufacturers:

a. Erico International Corporation; __________: www.erico.com/#sle.b. Harger Lightning & Grounding; __________: www.harger.com/#sle.

























































c. thermOweld, subsidiary of Continental Industries; division of Burndy LLC;__________: www.thermoweld.com/#sle.

d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.E. Ground Rod Electrodes:

1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.4. Manufacturers:

a. Erico International Corporation; __________: www.erico.com/#sle.b. Galvan Industries, Inc; __________: www.galvanelectrical.com/#sle.c. Harger Lightning & Grounding; __________: www.harger.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has beencompleted.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically.

Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or buryhorizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provideground plates.1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches below

finished grade.2. Indoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with 4 inches of top of rod

exposed.D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections withoutcutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitateinsertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, andcontact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for theitems to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommendedtorque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended toolsand dies.

E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the

previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.






















































E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply withspecified requirements.

END OF SECTION









SECTION 26 0529HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes,and other electrical work.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.B. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits.C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment

requirements for boxes.D. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior

luminaires.E. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for

exterior luminaires.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron andSteel Products; 2015.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and SteelHardware; 2009.

C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;2013.

D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.G. UL 5B - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment andcomponents to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials requiredfor installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces atthe installed locations.

4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and otherpotential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.


B. Sequencing:1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has

fully cured in accordance with Section 03 3000.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel

(strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete andmasonry anchors.



1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with NFPA 70.B. Comply with applicable building code.C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and

hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where

applicable.3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in

accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to besupported with a minimum safety factor of _____. Include consideration for vibration,equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and productlisting.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unlessspecifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment whereinstalled.a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise

indicated.b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or

approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM

A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be

supported.1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.3. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation; __________: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.

b. Erico International Corporation; __________: www.erico.com/#sle.c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co; __________: www.emerson.com/#sle.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation; __________: www.tnb.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.1. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation; __________: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.

b. Erico International Corporation; __________: www.erico.com/#sle.c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co; __________: www.emerson.com/#sle.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation; __________: www.tnb.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.























D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly ofsupports.1. Comply with MFMA-4.2. Channel (Strut) Used as Raceway (only where specifically indicated): Listed and labeled

as complying with UL 5B.3. Channel Material:

a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.

4. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch.5. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height.6. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation; __________: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.

b. Thomas & Betts Corporation; __________: www.tnb.com/#sle.c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc; __________: www.unistrut.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:

a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.b. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter.c. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter.d. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter.e. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter.f. Luminaires: 1/4 inch diameter.

F. Anchors and Fasteners:1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and

fastener types indicated for the specified applications.2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.8. Wood: Use wood screws.9. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically

designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.a. Comply with MFMA-4.b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.c. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch minimum base

metal thickness.d. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.

10. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICCEvaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.

11. Manufacturers - Mechanical Anchors:a. Hilti, Inc; __________: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.b. ITW Red Head, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc; __________:

www.itwredhead.com/#sle.c. Powers Fasteners, Inc; __________: www.powers.com/#sle.d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc; __________: www.strongtie.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


























































A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES)

evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended

ceiling support system or ceiling grid.F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural

Engineer.H. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) tosupport equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted onhollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locationsto provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on itsown weight for support.

I. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0533.13.J. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0533.16.K. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5100.L. Exterior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5600.M. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage

during concrete pour.N. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.O. Remove temporary supports.P. Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings (only where

specifically indicated or permitted) with color distinguishable from ceiling support wires inaccordance with NFPA 70.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION


















































SECTION 26 0533.13CONDUIT


A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

1. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding.C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.D. Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for

electrical service conduits.E. Section 27 1000 - Structured Cabling: Additional requirements for communications systems

conduits.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2013.E. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); 2003.F. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; 2012.G. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and

Intermediate Metal Conduit; 2005.H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; 2013.I. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;

2015.J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.K. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.N. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.O. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.P. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicatedfor the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with themost restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified,use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.



2. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metalconduit where emerging from underground.

3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, usegalvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.

4. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape toprovide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side ofwhere conduit emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

D. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:

a. Transformers.b. Motors.

2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTSA. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only

where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verifiedby pulling a mandrel through them.

B. Electrical Service Conduits: Also comply with Section 26 2100.C. Communications Systems Conduits: Also comply with Section 27 1000.D. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526.E. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.F. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.G. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size.5. Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.6. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.

H. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.2. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSIC80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

C. Fittings:1. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeledas complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and

compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20C80.1













2.04 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl

chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL6.

B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.C. PVC-Coated Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil.

D. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimumthickness of 15 mil.

2.05 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc; ______: www.afcweb.com/#sle.2. Electri-Flex Company; ______: www.electriflex.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeledas complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.


a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying withUL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.2.06 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Manufacturers:1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc; ______: www.afcweb.com/#sle.2. Electri-Flex Company; ______: www.electriflex.com/#sle.3. International Metal Hose; ______: www.metalhose.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduitlisted and labeled as complying with UL 360.

C. Fittings:1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with

UL 514B.2.07 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Manufacturers:1. Allied Tube & Conduit; ______: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries; ______: www.wheatland.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.































http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20514B






















a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying withUL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.

a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.2.08 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT

A. Manufacturers:1. Cantex Inc: www.cantexinc.com/#sle.2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.carlon.com/#sle.3. JM Eagle: www.jmeagle.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated,Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degreesC.

C. Fittings:1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with

UL 651; material to match conduit.2.09 ACCESSORIES

A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.1. Product: __________.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with theconduit to be installed.1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduitand fittings to be installed.

D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.


A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.D. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the

manufacturer.E. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.F. Conduit Routing:G. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 usingsuitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,ductwork, or other systems.








































H. Connections and Terminations:1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized

steel conduits prior to making connections.2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece

couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid

into connectors.5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock

nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect

conductors.7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical

continuity.I. Penetrations:

1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings andgrade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.

2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set

sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to

prevent entry of moisture and gases.6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of

membrane.7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and

curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations arenecessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system andmaintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealingwith submittals.

8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, usingmaterials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.

J. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansionand expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connectedequipment. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit

installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

K. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantialtemperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessiblepoint near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

L. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.END OF SECTION




















































SECTION 26 0533.23SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 2 PRODUCTS1.01 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete racewaysystem.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Do not use raceways for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

1.02 SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMSA. Manufacturers:

1. MonoSystems, Inc; ______: www.monosystems.com/#sle.2. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5.C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5A.D. Multioutlet Assemblies: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 111.

1.03 WIREWAYSA. Manufacturers:

1. Cooper B-Line, a division of Cooper Industries; _____: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.2. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products; ______: www.hoffmanonline.com/#sle.3. Schneider Electric; Square D Products; ______: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers; listed and labeled ascomplying with UL 870.

C. Wireway Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:1. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1, painted steel with screw-cover.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R, painted steel with screw-cover; include provision

for padlocking.D. Finish for Painted Steel Wireways: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.E. Where wireway size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.1.04 WALL DUCT

A. Manufacturers:1. Dennis Filges Company, Inc; ______: www.filgesco.com/#sle.2. Schneider Electric; Square D Products; ______: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Metal raceways specifically designed for enclosure of wiring to X-ray machinesand similar medical equipment; listed and labeled as complying with UL 870.

C. Material: Steel, unless otherwise indicated.D. Mounting Provisions: Suitable for surface- or flush-mounting as indicated.E. Size: As indicated on the drawings.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.



B. Verify that outlet boxes and conduit terminations are installed in proper locations and areproperly sized in accordance with NFPA 70 to accommodate raceways.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive raceways and that final surface finishes arecomplete, including painting.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.2.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Install raceways plumb and level.D. Arrange wireways and associated raceway connections to comply with NFPA 70, including but

not limited to requirements for deflected conductors and wireways used as pullboxes. Increasesize of wireway where necessary.

E. Secure and support raceways in accordance with Section 26 0529 at intervals complying withNFPA 70 and manufacturer's requirements.

F. Close unused raceway openings.G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.H. Identify raceways in accordance with Section 26 0553.

2.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect raceways for damage and defects.C. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective raceways.

2.04 CLEANINGA. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match

original factory finish.2.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed raceways from subsequent construction operations.END OF SECTION

















SECTION 26 0553IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Electrical identification requirements.B. Identification nameplates and labels.C. Underground warning tape.D. Floor marking tape.E. Warning signs and labels.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting.C. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for

power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011.B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.D. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain that are notalready identified in accordance with specified requirements.

B. Identification for Equipment:1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control

equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.a. Switchboards:

1) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sightof equipment.

2) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.Do not identify spares and spaces.

b. Panelboards:1) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight

of equipment.2) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a

door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.3) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify

load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces.c. Transfer Switches:

1) Identify power source and circuit number for both normal power source andstandby power source. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

2) Identify short circuit current rating based on the specific overcurrent protectivedevice type and settings protecting the transfer switch.

2. Service Equipment:a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination of

branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of



identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnectingmeans to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying thatbuilding or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction.

3. Use field-painted floor markings, floor marking tape, or warning labels to identify requiredequipment working clearances where indicated or where required by the authority havingjurisdiction.a. Field-Painted Floor Markings: Alternating black and white stripes, 3 inches wide,

painted in accordance with Section 09 9123 and 09 9113.4. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available

fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation byNFPA 70, including but not limited to the following.a. Service equipment.b. Industrial control panels.c. Motor control centers.d. Elevator control panels.e. Industrial machinery.

C. Identification for Conductors and Cables:1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519.2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded

and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder orbranch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits servedby more than one nominal voltage system.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELSA. Identification Nameplates:

1. Manufacturers:a. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com/#sle.c. Seton Identification Products; ______: www.seton.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Materials:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for

exterior use.3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically

non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engravedtext.a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater

than 4 inches.4. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched

text.5. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or

laser-etched text.6. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch

high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.B. Identification Labels:

1. Manufacturers:a. Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradyid.com/#sle.b. Brother International Corporation: www.brother-usa.com/#sle.c. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, andabrasion resistant.

3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unlessotherwise indicated.



2.03 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPEA. Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise

indicated.B. Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil.C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.D. Color:

1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.2. Tape for Buried Communication, Alarm, and Signal Lines: Black text on orange

background.2.04 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. Floor Marking Tape for Equipment Working Clearance Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl orpolyester tape with overlaminate, 3 inches wide, with alternating black and white stripes.

2.05 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELSA. Manufacturers:

1. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.2. Clarion Safety Systems, LLC; ______: www.clarionsafety.com/#sle.3. Seton Identification Products; ______: www.seton.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.C. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:2. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Warning Labels:1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or

self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; producedusing materials recognized to UL 969.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessoriesrecommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and

maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear

access.4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.7. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to

interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.



E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles orwrinkles and edges properly sealed.

F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches belowfinished grade.

G. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs

of improper adhesion.END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 0583WIRING CONNECTIONS


A. Electrical connections to equipment.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.B. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit.C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.E. Section 26 2816.16 - Enclosed Switches.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (R 2010).B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2012.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and

manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.2. Determine connection locations and requirements.

B. Sequencing:1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.


A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided forequipment.1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1.2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified

equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit

overcurrent protection.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 2816.16 and in individual equipment sections.C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726.D. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0533.13.E. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519.F. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0533.16.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.



B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduitwith watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable fortemperatures encountered.

D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and

equipment connection boxes.G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete

equipment wiring requirements.H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete

equipment wiring requirements.END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 0916ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS


A. Pushbutton and selector switches.B. Control stations and panels.C. Relays and time-delay relays.D. Control power transformers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements; 2005 (R2008).B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays

Rated 600 Volts; 2000 (R2005), with errata, 2008.C. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; 1993 (R2011).D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COMPONENTS

A. Control Switches and Stations:1. Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z.2. Contact Ratings: NEMA ICS 2, A150.

B. Magnetic Control Relays: NEMA ICS 2, Class A300.1. Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z.2. Contact Ratings: NEMA ICS 2, Class A150.3. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz, AC.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Solid-State Relays: NEMA ICS 2.1. Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z.2. Contact Ratings: NEMA ICS 2, Class A150.3. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz, AC.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Clock Timers: NEMA ICS 2, Class A300, 24 hour timer.1. Astronomical dial.2. Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z.3. Contact Ratings: NEMA ICS 2, Class A150.4. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz, AC.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ENCLOSURESA. Control Station Enclosures: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1.B. Relay Enclosures: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1.





B. Install individual relays and time-delay relays in enclosures.C. Make electrical wiring interconnections as indicated.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 0918REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHING DEVICES


A. Remote control switching relays.B. Remote sensors.C. Power supplies.D. Relay cabinets.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit.B. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Switch outlets and installation of switch

devices.C. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA ICS 4 - Application Guideline for Terminal Blocks; 2015.B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHING RELAYS

A. Description: Heavy duty, two-coil momentary contact type remote control relays.B. Contacts: Rated 20 amperes at 120 volts and with isolated and non-isolated pilot contacts

where indicated.C. Line Voltage Connections: Clamp type screw terminals.

2.02 REMOTE SENSORSA. Exterior Lighting Sensor:

1. Description: Photodiode lighting sensor in weatherproof housing.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 RELAY CABINETSA. Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable endwalls.B. Box Size: 24 inches wide x ______ inches high x 6 inches deep.C. Interior Panel: Metal, suitable for mounting components, matte white.D. Knockouts: __________.E. Metal Barriers: Between wiring of different systems and voltages.F. Power Terminals: NEMA ICS 4, unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure

screw connectors, rated 600 volts.G. Signal and Control Terminals: NEMA ICS 4, modular construction type, suitable for channel

mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts.H. Ground Bus Terminal Block: Bond each connector to enclosure.I. Plastic Raceway:

1. Description: Plastic channel with hinged or snap-on cover.



J. Power Supply: NFPA 70, Class 2 transformer.2.04 POWER LIMITED WIRE AND CABLE

A. Remote Control Cable: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation rated 60 degrees C, individualconductors twisted together and covered with PVC jacket.


A. Install wiring in conduit in accordance with Section 26 0533.13.B. Install relays to be accessible. Allow space for adequate ventilation and circulation of air.

3.02 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. Demonstrate proper operation of system.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 0919ENCLOSED CONTACTORS


A. General purpose contactors.B. Lighting contactors.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.C. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays

Rated 600 Volts; 2000 (R2005), with errata, 2008.B. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices; 2000 (R2010).C. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; 1993 (R2011).D. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having




A. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation; ______: ab.rockwellautomation.com/#sle.B. Eaton Corporation; ______: www.eaton.com/#sle.C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products; ______: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORSA. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor.B. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.C. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function.D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.E. Accessories:

1. Selector Switch: ON/OFF.2. Indicating Light: RED.3. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open.

2.03 LIGHTING CONTACTORSA. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.B. Configuration: Electrically held.C. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.D. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function.



E. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating forcontinuous loads.

F. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 normally open contacts in addition to seal-in contact.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed contactors where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install enclosed contactors plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle.D. Provide fuses for fusible switches; refer to Section 26 2813 for product requirements.E. Identify enclosed contactors in accordance with Section 26 0553.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 0923LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES


A. Occupancy sensors.B. Time switches.C. Outdoor photo controls.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall

switches, wall dimmers, and fan speed controllers.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C136.24 - American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment -Nonlocking (Button) Type Photocontrols; 2004 (R2010).

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.E. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic

Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2011.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.G. UL 773A - Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control; Current Edition, Including

All Revisions.H. UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.I. UL 917 - Clock-Operated Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors,

hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.C. Products for Switching of Electronic Ballasts/Drivers: Tested and rated to be suitable for peak

inrush currents specified in NEMA 410.2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; __________: www.lutron.com/#sle.2. Sensor Switch Inc; ___________: www.sensorswitch.com/#sle.3. WattStopper; __________: www.wattstopper.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.5. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained

from a single supplier.B. All Occupancy Sensors:

1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor usecapable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small



desktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control ofload indicated.

2. Sensor Technology:a. Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by

sensing movement of thermal energy between zones.b. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing frequency

shifts in emitted and reflected inaudible sound waves.c. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to

detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and ultrasonictechnologies.

d. Passive Infrared/Acoustic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detectoccupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and audible sound sensingtechnologies.

3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensortype in dual technology units.

4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupantpresence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during anadjustable turn-off delay time interval.

5. Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Field configurable turn-on and hold-on activationwith settings for activation by either or both sensing technologies.

6. Passive Infrared Lens Field of View: Field customizable by addition of factory maskingmaterial, adjustment of integral blinders, or similar means to block motion detection inselected areas.

7. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes.8. Sensitivity: Field adjustable.9. Adaptive Technology: Field selectable; capable of self-adjusting sensitivity and time delay

according to conditions.10. Compatibility (Non-Dimming Sensors): Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting,

low-voltage lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting withelectronic and magnetic ballasts, and fractional motor loads, with no minimum loadrequirements.

11. Load Rating for Line Voltage Occupancy Sensors: As required to control the loadindicated on drawings.

C. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:

a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box atstandard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integratedmanual control capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode.

b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings,provide line voltage units with self-contained relay.

c. Manual-Off Override Control: When used to turn off load while in automatic-on mode,unit to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected duringthe delayed-off time interval.

d. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unlessotherwise indicated.

2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motionwithin an area of 900 square feet.

3. Ultrasonic Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of400 square feet.

4. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable ofdetecting motion within an area of 900 square feet.

D. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:

a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation.b. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.



2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square

feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200

square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.3. Ultrasonic Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:

a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 500 squarefeet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.

b. Medium Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,000 squarefeet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.

c. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 2,000square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet.

4. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square

feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200

square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.5. Passive Infrared/Acoustic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:

a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 squarefeet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.

b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet.

E. Directional Occupancy Sensors:1. All Directional Occupancy Sensors: Designed for wall or ceiling mounting, with integral

swivel for field adjustment of motion detection coverage.a. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.

2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Directional Occupancy Sensors:a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 40 feet at

a mounting height of 10 feet.b. Long Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 80 feet at a

mounting height of 10 feet.3. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Directional Occupancy Sensors: Capable of

detecting motion within a distance of 40 feet at a mounting height of 10 feet.2.03 TIME SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:1. Intermatic, Inc; __________: www.intermatic.com/#sle.2. Tork, a division of NSI Industries LLC; __________: www.tork.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.4. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained

from a single supplier.B. Digital Electronic Time Switches:

1. Description: Factory-assembled solid state programmable controller with LCD display,listed and labeled as complying with UL 916 or UL 917.

2. Program Capability:a. Astronomic Time Switches: Single channel, capable of different schedule for each

day of the week with additional holiday schedule available to override normal schedulefor selected days and field-configurable astronomic feature to automatically adjust forseasonal changes in sunrise and sunset times.

3. Schedule Capacity: Not less than 16 programmable on/off operations.4. Provide automatic daylight savings time and leap year compensation.5. Provide power outage backup to retain programming and maintain clock.6. Manual override: Capable of overriding current schedule both permanently and

temporarily until next scheduled event.7. Provide remote photocell input with light level adjustment.



8. Input Supply Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.9. Output Switch Configuration: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.10. Provide lockable enclosure; environmental type per NEMA 250 as specified for the

following installation locations:a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 1.b. Outdoor locations: Type 3R.

2.04 OUTDOOR PHOTO CONTROLSA. Manufacturers:

1. Intermatic, Inc; __________: www.intermatic.com/#sle.2. Tork, a division of NSI Industries LLC; __________: www.tork.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.4. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained

from a single supplier.B. Button Type Outdoor Photo Controls

1. Description: Direct-wired photo control unit complying with ANSI C136.24 withweatherproof gasketed wall plate where required or indicated, listed and labeled ascomplying with UL 773A.

2. Housing: Weather resistant polycarbonate.3. Photo Sensor: Cadmium sulfide.4. Light Level Activation: 1 to 3 footcandles turn-on and 3 to 1 turn-off to turn-on ratio with

delayed turn-off.5. Voltage: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.6. Failure Mode: Fails to the on position.7. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are

properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.C. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or

wall plates.D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

lighting control devices.F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the

service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed.G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install lighting control devices in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where

applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required forinstallation of lighting control devices provided under this section.1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

a. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 48 inches above finished floor.



2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of lighting control devices unless otherwiseindicated.

3. Locate wall switch occupancy sensors on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architectto obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to

branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.E. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place.F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance

with Section 26 2726.G. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.H. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely

flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain onwall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized roughopenings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

I. Identify lighting control devices in accordance with Section 26 0553.J. Occupancy Sensor Locations:

1. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicatewhich rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required forcomplete coverage of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendationsfor installed devices.

2. Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensors aminimum of 4 feet from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as permanufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers.

K. Outdoor Photo Control Locations:1. Where possible, locate outdoor photo controls with photo sensor facing north. If north

facing photo sensor is not possible, install with photo sensor facing east, west, or down.2. Locate outdoor photo controls so that photo sensors do not face artificial light sources,

including light sources controlled by the photo control itself.L. Install outdoor photo controls so that connections are weatherproof. Do not install photo controls

with conduit stem facing up in order to prevent infiltration of water into the photo control.M. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for minimum of 100 hours or prescribed period per

manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps thatfail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.

N. Unless otherwise indicated, install power packs for lighting control devices above accessibleceiling or above access panel in inaccessible ceiling near the sensor location.

O. Where indicated, install separate compatible wall switches for manual control interface withlighting control devices or associated power packs.

P. Unless otherwise indicated, install switches on load side of power packs so that switch does notturn off power pack.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects.C. Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light

thresholds where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record testresults in written report to be included with submittals.

D. Test time switches to verify proper operation.E. Test outdoor photo controls to verify proper operation, including time delays where applicable.



F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices.3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.B. Adjust occupancy sensor settings to minimize undesired activations while optimizing energy

savings, and to achieve desired function as indicated or as directed by Architect.C. Adjust position of directional occupancy sensors and outdoor motion sensors to achieve optimal

coverage as required.D. Where indicated or as directed by Architect, install factory masking material or adjust integral

blinders on passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology occupancy sensor lenses to blockundesired motion detection.

E. Adjust time switch settings to achieve desired operation schedule as indicated or as directed byArchitect. Record settings in written report to be included with submittals.

F. Adjust external sliding shields on outdoor photo controls under optimum lighting conditions toachieve desired turn-on and turn-off activation as indicated or as directed by Architect.

G. Adjust daylighting controls under optimum lighting conditions after all room finishes, furniture,and window treatments have been installed to achieve desired operation as indicated or asdirected by Architect. Record settings in written report to be included with submittals. Readjustcontrols calibrated prior to installation of final room finishes, furniture, and window treatmentsthat do not function properly as determined by Architect.


original factory finish.3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to Architect, andcorrect deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

B. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, programming, and maintenance oflighting control devices.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.2. Location: At project site.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 2200LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS


A. General purpose transformers.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.C. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 10 CFR 431, Subpart K - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial

Equipment - Distribution Transformers; Current Edition.B. IEEE C57.94 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and

Maintenance of Dry-Type General Purpose Distribution and Power Transformers; 1982(R2006).

C. IEEE C57.96 - Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 2013.D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.E. NECA 409 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers; 2009.F. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications; 2014.G. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.I. UL 506 - Standard for Specialty Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed andmanufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed, classified, and labeled as suitable forthe purpose intended.

B. Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according toIEEE C57.96 under the following service conditions:1. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet.2. Ambient Temperature:

a. Greater than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 104 degrees F.b. Less than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 77 degrees F.

C. Core: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresisand eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities substantially below saturation point, evenat 10 percent primary overvoltage. Tightly clamp core laminations to prevent plate movementand maintain consistent pressure throughout core length.

D. Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to effectivelyseal out moisture and other contaminants.

E. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.F. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding

strap.G. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=IEEE%20C57.96

















H. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overloadcapacity based on rated winding temperature rise.

2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERSA. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506

or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings.B. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise:

1. Less than 15 kVA: Class 180 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C averagewinding temperature rise.

2. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C averagewinding temperature rise.

C. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded.D. Winding Taps:

1. Less than 3 kVA: None.2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5

percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.4. 500 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two 2.5 percent

full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.E. Energy Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K.F. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20.G. Mounting Provisions:

1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.

H. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20.1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the

following installation locations:2. Construction: Steel.

a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated.b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations.4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

END OF SECTION










SECTION 26 2413SWITCHBOARDS


A. Low-voltage (600 V and less) switchboards and associated accessories for service anddistribution applications.

B. Overcurrent protective devices for switchboards.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and


A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; FederalSpecification; Revision E, 2013.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NECA 400 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Switchboards; 2007.D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.E. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.F. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards; 2011.G. NEMA PB 2.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.I. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 891 - Switchboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for

switchboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components andaccessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, bus ampacities, overcurrent protective devicearrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminalinformation, and installed features and accessories.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of switchboards and finalequipment settings.

E. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenanceprocedures and intervals.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.



B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as aNationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, NECA 400, and NEMA PB 2.1.B. Store in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation (including

outdoor switchboards, which are not weatherproof until completely and properly installed).Where necessary, provide temporary enclosure space heaters or temporary power forpermanent factory-installed space heaters.

C. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover toprotect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Switchboards:1. Eaton Corporation; ______: www.eaton.com/#sle.2. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.3. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 SWITCHBOARDS

A. Provide switchboards consisting of all required components, control power transformers,instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operatingsystem.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Description: Dead-front switchboard assemblies complying with NEMA PB 2, and listed and

labeled as complying with UL 891; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on thedrawings.

D. Front-Connected Switchboards:E. Service Conditions:

1. Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for operation under thefollowing service conditions without derating:a. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.

2. Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for operation at indicatedratings under the service conditions at the installed location.

F. Main Devices: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for theinstallation. Provide separate pull section and/or top-mounted pullbox as indicated or asrequired to facilitate installation of incoming feed.

G. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 891 temperature rise requirements.1. Through bus (horizontal cross bus) to be fully rated through full length of switchboard

(non-tapered). Tapered bus is not permitted.2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus through full length of switchboard, with a

suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.3. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.4. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.1. Line Conductor Terminations:



a. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum orcopper conductors.

b. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.2. Load Conductor Terminations:

a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.b. Lug Type:

1) Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.I. Enclosures:

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: As indicated on the drawings.2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

J. Future Provisions:1. Prepare designated spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors,

mounting hardware and all other required provisions.2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Circuit Breakers:1. Interrupting Capacity:

a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the shortcircuit current rating indicated, but not less than specified minimum requirements.

b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less thanthe short circuit current rating indicated.

c. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with upstreamdevices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit current ratingindicated.

2. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:a. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating

circuit breakers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FSW-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on thedrawings.

b. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse timetripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping elementfor short circuit protection.

c. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required tocomplete installation:1) Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip

actuator.2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Factory test switchboards according to NEMA PB 2, including the following production (routine)

tests on each switchboard assembly or component:1. Dielectric tests.2. Mechanical operation tests.3. Grounding of instrument transformer cases test.4. Electrical operation and control wiring tests, including polarity and sequence tests.5. Ground-fault sensing equipment test.


A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install switchboards in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 400, and NEMA

PB 2.1.C. Arrange equipment to provide required clearances and maintenance access, including

accommodations for any drawout devices.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI/NEMA%20PB%202.1





D. Where switchboard is indicated to be mounted with inaccessible side against wall, provideminimum clearance of 1/2 inch between switchboard and wall.

E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.F. Install switchboards plumb and level.G. Unless otherwise indicated, mount switchboards on properly sized 4 inch high concrete pad

constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.I. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories.J. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as

required to complete installation.K. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in switchboards.L. Identify switchboards in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.02 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.B. Adjust alignment of switchboard covers and doors.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Clean dirt and debris from switchboard enclosures and components according to

manufacturer's instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION



























SECTION 26 2416PANELBOARDS


A. Power distribution panelboards.B. Lighting and appliance panelboards.C. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and



B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; 2009.D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.E. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.F. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; 2011.G. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of

Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.H. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.J. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.K. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.L. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.N. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.O. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.P. UL 1699 - Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and workingclearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearancerequirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation offlush-mounted panelboards where indicated.



4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with theconductors to be installed.


1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for

panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components andaccessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entrylocations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment with

all required clearances indicated.2. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where

acceptable, series rated systems.3. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.

D. Field Quality Control Test Reports.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, and installation of product.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actualinstalled circuiting arrangements.

G. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenanceprocedures and intervals.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution

requirements.C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructionsand NECA 407.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas orheavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage topanelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of

panelboards:1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.


A. Eaton Corporation; ______: www.eaton.com/#sle.



B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products; ______: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.C. Siemens Industry, Inc; ______: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle.D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.E. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same

manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtainedfrom a single supplier.

2.02 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTSA. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the

following service conditions:1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.2. Ambient Temperature:

a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.C. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available faultcurrent at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

2. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70.D. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service

equipment according to UL 869A.E. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.G. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.

1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for eachfeeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.

2. Provide 200 percent rated neutral bus and lugs where indicated, where oversized neutralconductors are provided, or where panelboards are fed from K-rated transformers.

3. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug foreach feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.I. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for thefollowing installation locations:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.b. Increase gutter space as required where sub-feed lugs, feed-through lugs, gutter

taps, or oversized lugs are provided.3. Fronts:

a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough

opening.c. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise

indicated.4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

J. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices includingbussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

K. Multi-Section Panelboards: Provide enclosures of the same height, with feed-through lugs orsub-feed lugs and feeders as indicated or as required to interconnect sections.



L. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to completeinstallation:1. Feed-through lugs.2. Sub-feed lugs.

2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDSA. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type,

circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations andfeatures as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper

conductors.2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum or copper.2. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum or copper.

D. Circuit Breakers:1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints.2. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.

E. Enclosures:1. Provide flush-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDSA. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit

type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings,configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper

conductors.2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective

devices.2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum or copper.3. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum or copper.

D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.E. Enclosures:

1. Provide flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.2. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICESA. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuitbreakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity:a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short

circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than

the short circuit current rating indicated.3. Conductor Terminations:

a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.



4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time trippingelement for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for shortcircuit protection.

5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.6. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:

a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL943, class A for protection of personnel.

b. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Combination type listed ascomplying with UL 1699.

c. 100 Percent Rated Circuit Breakers: Listed for application within the panelboardwhere installed at 100 percent of the continuous current rating.

7. Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking for all branch circuitsserving fluorescent lighting.

8. Provide listed high intensity discharge lighting rated circuit breakers with HID marking forall branch circuits serving HID lighting.

9. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.10. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers.11. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by NFPA 70.12. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to

complete installation:a. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROLA. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are

consistent with the indicated requirements.C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.F. Install panelboards plumb.G. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and

rough opening completely covered.H. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or

switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.I. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard

stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

1. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipmentground bus only. Do not terminate on isolated/insulated ground bus.

K. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.













































L. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or asrequired to complete installation.

M. Multi-Wire Branch Circuits: Group grounded and ungrounded conductors together in thepanelboard as required by NFPA 70.

N. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as indicated.O. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.P. Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de-energizing

essential loads where indicated. Also provide for the following:Q. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section

7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than _____ amperes. Tests listedas optional are not required.

D. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.E. Test AFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.F. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.G. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.


torque settings.B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each

measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directoriesaccordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION





































SECTION 26 2713ELECTRICITY METERING


A. Equipment for Owner electricity metering:1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Cabinets and enclosures for metering

system components.D. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards: For interface with meters specified in this section.E. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate work to provide equipment suitable for interface with electricity metering

systems to be provided.B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct meeting with facility representative and other related

equipment manufacturers to discuss electricity metering system interface requirements.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution

requirements.C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.


A. Electricity Meters:1. Same as manufacturer of electrical distribution equipment used for this project.

a. Eaton Corporation; ______: www.eaton.com/#sle.b. Schneider Electric; Square D Products; ______: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 EQUIPMENT FOR OWNER ELECTRICITY METERING

A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.B. Provide electricity metering systems and associated components compatible with the equipment

and associated circuits to be metered.C. Service Conditions: Provide electricity meters suitable for operation under the service

conditions at the installed location.D. Enclosures:



1. Where not furnished by manufacturer, provide required cabinets and enclosures inaccordance with Section 26 0533.16.

2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: As indicated on the drawings.3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of metering systems and associated components are

consistent with the indicated requirements.C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive meters.D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 0529.D. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.E. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 as required.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 2726WIRING DEVICES


A. Wall switches.B. Wall dimmers.C. Receptacles.D. Wall plates.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.D. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Devices for automatic control of lighting, including

occupancy sensors, in-wall time switches, and in-wall interval timers.E. Section 27 1000 - Structured Cabling: Voice and data jacks.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification;

Revision G, 2001.B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification);

Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999.C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (R 2010).F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2012.G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.K. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installedunder other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements ofactual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed doorswings.

4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, toprovide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.

5. Coordinate the core drilling of holes for poke-through assemblies with the work coveredunder other sections.



6. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain directionprior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS

A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere

rating not less than that of the branch circuit.C. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles

installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.D. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens.F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.G. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.H. For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors.I. For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors.

2.02 WIRING DEVICE FINISHESA. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white nylon wall plate.C. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate.D. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover.E. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Orange.F. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power: Red with red nylon wall plate.G. Clock Hanger Receptacles: Brown with stainless steel wall plate.H. Above-Floor Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with satin aluminum housing.I. Flush Floor Box Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with aluminum cover and ring/flange.J. Flush Poke-Through Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with aluminum cover and aluminum

flange.K. Access Floor Boxes: Gray wiring devices with gray steel cover with insert to match floor

covering.2.03 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc; ______: www.leviton.com/#sle.2. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switcheswith silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed ascomplying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for

back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.



C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggletype switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw,three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

2.04 WALL DIMMERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc; ______: www.leviton.com/#sle.2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Maestro Series: www.lutron.com/#sle.3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Wall Dimmers - General Requirements: Solid-state with continuous full-range even controlfollowing square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failurepreset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with NEMAWD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings suitable forload controlled as indicated on the drawings.

C. Control: Slide control type with separate on/off switch.D. Power Rating, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required to Control the Load Indicated on the

Drawings:1. Incandescent: 600 W.2. Magnetic Low-Voltage: 600 VA.3. Electronic Low-Voltage: 400 VA.4. Fluorescent: 600 VA.

2.05 RECEPTACLESA. Manufacturers:

1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc; ______: www.leviton.com/#sle.2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com/#sle.3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.5. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system,

provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer inlocations indicated.

B. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMAWD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types asindicated on the drawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for

back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.3. Hospital Grade Receptacles: Listed as complying with UL 498 Supplement SD, with green

dot hospital grade mark on device face.C. Convenience Receptacles:

1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

2. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V,NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex asindicated on the drawings.

2.06 WALL PLATESA. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated; ______: www.hubbell-wiring.com/#sle.2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc; ______: www.leviton.com/#sle.3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; __________: www.lutron.com/#sle.4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us/#sle.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20WD%201



















http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI/NEMA%20WD%206














5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.6. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system,

provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer inlocations indicated.

B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring

devices.2. Size: Standard; __________.3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.D. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel.E. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged

cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with coverclosed.



properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

wiring devices.F. Verify that core drilled holes for poke-through assemblies are in proper locations.G. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations.H. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.


3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA

130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for

installation of wiring devices provided under this section.1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.b. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches above finished floor.c. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.

2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same

location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wallplate.

4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge ofdoor frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain directionprior to proceeding with work.

5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountainaccording to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

http://www.necanet.org/store/products/index.cfm/NECA%20130-10



















D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacentdevices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do notconnect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal andtightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-inpressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuitequipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not usefeed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.

I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.J. Install wall switches with OFF position down.K. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as

instructed by manufacturer.L. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.M. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted

receptacles with grounding pole on left.N. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely

covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes orimproperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting thisrequirement.

O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed ordesignated for future use.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.C. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify

proper operation.D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's

instructions.F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by

Architect.3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to matchoriginal factory finish.

END OF SECTION















































SECTION 26 2816.13ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A. Enclosed circuit breakers.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and



B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.F. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.G. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.H. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.I. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, orother potential obstructions within dedicated equipment spaces and within workingclearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearancerequirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation offlush-mounted enclosed circuit breakers where indicated.

4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with theconductors to be installed.


1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for circuit

breakers, enclosures, and other installed components and accessories.1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of circuit breaker upon request.



C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings,short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installedfeatures and accessories.1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed circuit breakers and adjacent

equipment with all required clearances indicated.2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where

acceptable, series rated systems.4. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.



A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas orheavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage toenclosed circuit breaker internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient temperature between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F during and after

installation of enclosed circuit breakers.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton Corporation; ______: www.eaton.com/#sle.B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products; ______: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.C. Siemens Industry, Inc; ______: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle.D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.E. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed circuit breakers and associated components produced by

the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project andobtained from a single supplier.

2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERSA. Description: Units consisting of molded case circuit breakers individually mounted in

enclosures.B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the

following service conditions:1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.2. Ambient Temperature: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

D. Short Circuit Current Rating:E. Enclosed Circuit Breakers Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as

service equipment according to UL 869A.F. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.G. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.H. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed circuit breaker, with a suitable

lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.I. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.



1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for thefollowing installation locations:

J. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuitbreakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 whereapplicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Interrupting Capacity:1. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit

current rating indicated, but not less than:2. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the

short circuit current rating indicated.C. Conductor Terminations:

1. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.D. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping

element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuitprotection.

E. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.F. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:G. Provide listed high intensity discharge lighting rated circuit breakers with HID marking for all

branch circuits serving HID lighting.H. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete

installation:1. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed circuit breakers are consistent with the indicated

requirements.C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed circuit breakers.D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.E. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb.F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed

circuit breakers such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79inches above the floor or working platform.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.H. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as

required to complete installation.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.



B. Inspect and test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NETA ATS, except Section4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for circuit breakers used forservice entrance and for circuit breakers larger than _____ amperes. Tests listed as optionalare not required.

D. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.E. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.F. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed circuit breakers.


torque settings.3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from circuit breaker enclosures and components according tomanufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 2913ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 2 PRODUCTS1.01 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

A. Provide enclosed controller assemblies consisting of all required components, control powertransformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a completeoperating system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Description: Enclosed controllers complying with NEMA ICS 2, and listed and labeled as

complying with UL 60947-1 and UL 60947-4-1; ratings, configurations and features as indicatedon the drawings.

D. Service Conditions:1. Provide controllers and associated components suitable for operation under the following

service conditions without derating:a. Altitude:

1) Class 1 Km Equipment (devices utilizing power semiconductors, e.g. variablefrequency controllers): Less than 3,300 feet.

2) Class 2 Km Equipment (electromagnetic and manual devices): Less than 6,600feet.

b. Ambient Temperature: Between 32 degrees F and 104 degrees F.2. Provide controllers and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings

under the service conditions at the installed location.E. Short Circuit Current Rating:F. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.G. Enclosures:

1. Comply with NEMA ICS 6.2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the

following installation locations:3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

H. Instrument Transformers:1. Comply with IEEE C57.13.2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks.4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means.

1.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICESA. Overload Relays:

1. Provide overload relays and, where applicable, associated current elements/heaters,selected according to actual installed motor nameplate data, in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70; include consideration for motor servicefactor and ambient temperature correction, where applicable.

2. Inverse-Time Trip Class Rating: Class 20 unless otherwise indicated or required.3. Trip-free operation.4. Visible trip indication.5. Resettable.

a. Employ manual reset unless otherwise indicated.b. Do not employ automatic reset with two-wire control.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 3213ENGINE GENERATORS


A. Packaged engine generator system and associated components and accessories:1. Engine and engine accessory equipment.2. Alternator (generator).3. Generator set control system.4. Generator set enclosure.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 3600 - Transfer Switches.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D975 - Standard Specification for Diesel Fuel Oils; 2015b.B. NECA/EGSA 404 - Standard for Installing Generator Sets; 2014.C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014.D. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code; 2015.E. NFPA 37 - Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas

Turbines; 2015.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.G. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities Code; 2015.H. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2013.I. UL 2200 - Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each

product, including ratings, configurations, dimensions, finishes, weights, service conditionrequirements, and installed features. Include alternator starting capabilities, engine fuelconsumption rates, and cooling, combustion air, and exhaust requirements.1. Include generator set sound level test data.

C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations of systemcomponents, required clearances, and field connection locations. Include systeminterconnection schematic diagrams showing all factory and field connections.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on system operation, equipmentprogramming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures andintervals.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with the following:

1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).2. NFPA 37 (Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and

Gas Turbines).3. NFPA 30 (Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code).

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section withminimum three years documented experience with engine generator systems of similar size,type, and complexity; manufacturer's authorized installer.



D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as aNationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store generator sets in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NECA/EGSA 404.B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or

heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to generator

set components, enclosure, and finish.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Packaged Engine Generator Set:1. Caterpillar Inc; _________: www.cat.com/#sle.2. Cummins Power Generation Inc; __________: www.cumminspower.com/#sle.3. Detroit Diesel.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM

A. Provide new engine generator system consisting of all required equipment, sensors, conduit,boxes, wiring, piping, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for acomplete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Packaged Engine Generator Set:

1. Type: Diesel (compression ignition).2. Power Rating: _____ kW, standby.3. Voltage: As indicated on drawings.

D. Service Conditions: Provide engine generator system and associated components suitable foroperation under the service conditions at the installed location.

2.03 ENGINE AND ENGINE ACCESSORY EQUIPMENTA. Provide engine with adequate horsepower to achieve specified power output at rated speed,

accounting for alternator efficiency and parasitic loads.B. Engine Fuel System - Diesel (Compression Ignition):

1. Fuel Source: Diesel, ASTM D975 No. 2-D or approved cold weather diesel blends.C. Engine Starting System:

1. System Type: Electric, with DC solenoid-activated starting motor(s).2. Battery(s):

a. Battery Type: Lead-acid.b. Battery Capacity: Size according to manufacturer's recommendations for achieving

starting and load acceptance requirements under worst case ambient temperature;capable of providing cranking through two complete periods of cranking limitertime-outs without recharging.

c. Provide battery rack, cables, and connectors suitable for the supplied battery(s); sizebattery cables according to manufacturer's recommendations for cable length to beinstalled.

3. Battery-Charging Alternator: Engine-driven, with integral solid-state voltage regulation.D. Engine Lubrication System:

1. System Type: Full pressure, with engine-driven, positive displacement lubrication oilpump, replaceable full-flow oil filter(s), and dip-stick for oil level indication. Provide oilcooler where recommended by manufacturer.



E. Engine Cooling System:1. System Type: Closed-loop, liquid-cooled, with unit-mounted radiator/fan and engine-driven

coolant pump; suitable for providing adequate cooling while operating at full load underworst case ambient temperature.

2. Fan Guard: Provide suitable guard to protect personnel from accidental contact with fan.3. Coolant Heater: Provide thermostatically controlled coolant heater to improve starting

under cold ambient conditions; size according to manufacturer's recommendations forachieving starting and load acceptance requirements under worst case ambienttemperature.

F. Engine Air Intake and Exhaust System:1. Air Intake Filtration: Provide engine-mounted, replaceable, dry element filter.2. Engine Exhaust Connection: Provide suitable, approved flexible connector for coupling

engine to exhaust system.2.04 ALTERNATOR (GENERATOR)

A. Alternator: 4-pole, 1800 rpm (60 Hz output) revolving field, synchronous generator complyingwith NEMA MG 1; connected to engine with flexible coupling; voltage output configuration asindicated, with reconnectable leads for 3 phase alternators.

B. Temperature Rise: Comply with UL 2200.C. Insulation System: NEMA MG 1, Class F or Class H; suitable for alternator temperature rise.D. Enclosure: NEMA MG 1, drip-proof.E. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than five percent.

2.05 GENERATOR SET CONTROL SYSTEMA. Provide microprocessor-based control system for automatic control, monitoring, and protection

of generator set. Include sensors, wiring, and connections necessary for functions/indicationsspecified.

B. Control Panel:1. Control Panel Mounting: Unit-mounted unless otherwise indicated; vibration isolated.2. Generator Set Control Functions:

a. Automatic Mode: Initiates generator set start/shutdown upon receiving correspondingsignal from remote device (e.g. automatic transfer switch).

b. Manual Mode: Initiates generator set start/shutdown upon direction from operator.c. Reset Mode: Clears all faults, allowing generator set restart after a shutdown.d. Emergency Stop: Immediately shuts down generator set (without time delay) and

prevents automatic restarting until manually reset.e. Cycle Cranking: Programmable crank time, rest time, and number of cycles.f. Time Delay: Programmable for shutdown (engine cooldown) and start (engine

warmup).g. Voltage Adjustment: Adjustable through range of plus/minus 5 percent.

3. Generator Set Status Indications:a. Voltage (Volts AC): Line-to-line, line-to-neutral for each phase.b. Current (Amps): For each phase.c. Frequency (Hz).d. Real power (W/kW).e. Reactive power (VAR/kVAR).f. Apparent power (VA/kVA).g. Power factor.h. Duty Level: Actual load as percentage of rated power.i. Engine speed (RPM).j. Battery voltage (Volts DC).k. Engine oil pressure.l. Engine coolant temperature.



m. Engine run time.n. Generator powering load (position signal from transfer switch).

4. Generator Set Protection and Warning/Shutdown Indications:a. Comply with NFPA 110; configurable for NFPA 110 Level 1 or Level 2, or NFPA 99

systems including but not limited to the following protections/indications:1) Overcrank (shutdown).2) Low coolant temperature (warning).3) High coolant temperature (warning).4) High coolant temperature (shutdown).5) Low oil pressure (shutdown).6) Overspeed (shutdown).7) Low fuel level (warning).8) Low coolant level (warning/shutdown).9) Generator control not in automatic mode (warning).10) High battery voltage (warning).11) Low cranking voltage (warning).12) Low battery voltage (warning).13) Battery charger failure (warning).

b. In addition to NFPA 110 requirements, provide the following protections/indications:1) High AC voltage (shutdown).2) Low AC voltage (shutdown).3) High frequency (shutdown).4) Low frequency (shutdown).5) Overcurrent (shutdown).

c. Provide contacts for local and remote common alarm.d. Provide lamp test function that illuminates all indicator lamps.

5. Other Control Panel Features:a. Event log.

C. Remote Annunciator:1. Remote Annunciator Mounting: Wall-mounted; Provide flush-mounted annunciator for

finished areas and surface-mounted annunciator for non-finished areas unless otherwiseindicated.

2. Generator Set Status Indications:a. Generator powering load (via position signal from transfer switch).b. Communication functional.

3. Generator Set Warning/Shutdown Indications:a. Comply with NFPA 110 for Level 1 systems including but not limited to the following

indications:1) Overcrank (shutdown).2) Low coolant temperature (warning).3) High coolant temperature (warning).4) High coolant temperature (shutdown).5) Low oil pressure (shutdown).6) Overspeed (shutdown).7) Low fuel level (warning).8) Low coolant level (warning/shutdown).9) Generator control not in automatic mode (warning).10) High battery voltage (warning).11) Low cranking voltage (warning).12) Low battery voltage (warning).13) Battery charger failure (warning).

b. Provide audible alarm with silence function.c. Provide lamp test function that illuminates all indicator lamps.





A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install generator sets and associated accessories in accordance with NECA/EGSA 404.C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling

inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel.C. Provide all equipment, tools, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing,

including load bank and fuel.D. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


original factory finish.3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of system to Owner, and correct deficiencies ormake adjustments as directed.

B. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of system.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 3600TRANSFER SWITCHES


A. Transfer switches for low-voltage (600 V and less) applications and associated accessories:1. Automatic transfer switches.2. Includes bypass/isolation transfer switches.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.B. Section 26 3213 - Engine Generators: For interface with transfer switches.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA ICS 10 Part 1 - Industrial Control and Systems Part 1: Electromechanical AC Transfer

Switch Equipment; 2005.B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.D. UL 1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


product, including ratings, configurations, dimensions, finishes, weights, service conditionrequirements, and installed features.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with the following:

1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience with power transfer systems of similar size, type,and complexity; manufacturer's authorized installer.



A. Transfer Switches:1. ASCO Power Technologies; ______: www.ascopower.com/#sle.2. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.3. Russelectric.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Provide complete power transfer system consisting of all required equipment, conduit, boxes,wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operatingsystem that provides the functional intent indicated.



B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Comply with NEMA ICS 10 Part 1, and list and label as complying with UL 1008 for the

classification of the intended application (e.g. emergency, optional standby).D. Load Classification: Classified for total system load (any combination of motor, electric

discharge lamp, resistive, and tungsten lamp loads with tungsten lamp loads not exceeding 30percent of the continuous current rating) unless otherwise indicated or required.

E. Service Conditions: Provide transfer switches suitable for continuous operation at indicatedratings under the service conditions at the installed location.1. Altitude: 3300 feet.

F. Automatic Transfer Switches:1. Description: Transfer switches with automatically initiated transfer between sources;

electrically operated and mechanically held.2. Control Functions:

a. Automatic mode.b. Test Mode: Simulates failure of primary/normal source.c. Adjustable Time Delays:

1) Engine generator start time delay; delays engine start signal to overridemomentary primary/normal source failures.

2) Transfer to alternate/emergency source time delay.3) Retransfer to primary/normal source time delay.4) Engine generator cooldown time delay; delays engine shutdown following

retransfer to primary/normal source to permit generator to run unloaded forcooldown period.

d. Engine Exerciser: Provides programmable scheduled exercising of engine generatorselectable with or without transfer to load; provides memory retention during poweroutage.

3. Automatic Sequence of Operations:a. Upon failure of primary/normal source for a programmable time period (engine

generator start time delay), initiate starting of engine generator where applicable.b. When alternate/emergency source is available, transfer load to alternate/emergency

source after programmable time delay.c. When primary/normal source has been restored, retransfer to primary/normal source

after a programmable time delay. Bypass time delay if alternate/emergency sourcefails and primary/normal source is available.

d. Where applicable, initiate shutdown of engine generator after programmable enginecooldown time delay.

G. Bypass/Isolation Transfer Switches:1. Description: Factory-assembled units consisting of interconnected transfer switch and

bypass/isolation switch that permits manual bypass and isolation of the transfer switch withconnection of the load to either source.

2. Bypass/Isolation Switch Type: Provide overlapping (make-before-break) switches with nointerruption of power to load. Load break (break-before-make) switches that interruptpower to load are not acceptable.

3. Bypass/Isolation Operation:a. Operable from exterior of enclosure.b. Normal Mode: Provides for normal operation of transfer switch.c. Test Mode: Provides for operational testing of bypassed transfer switch without

affecting power to load.d. Isolate Mode: Provides for complete isolation of transfer switch from all power

sources, permitting removal from unit.




A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.C. Identify transfer switches and associated system wiring in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Automatic Transfer Switches:

1. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.2. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.3. The

insulation-resistance tests listed as optional are not required.D. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with

Contract Documents.3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of transfer switches to Owner, and correctdeficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 5100INTERIOR LIGHTING


A. Interior luminaires.B. Emergency lighting units.C. Exit signs.D. Ballasts and drivers.E. Fluorescent emergency power supply units.F. Lamps.G. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.D. Section 26 0919 - Enclosed Contactors: Lighting contactors.E. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including occupancy

sensors, outdoor motion sensors, time switches, outdoor photo controls, and daylightingcontrols.

F. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.G. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 47 CFR 15 - Radio Frequency Devices; current edition.B. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and

Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 2002.C. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent

Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; 2011.D. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V

and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Cor 1, 2012).E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.F. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; 2006.G. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; 2006.H. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic

Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2011.I. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; 2012.J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.K. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.L. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.N. UL 1029 - High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.O. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



P. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under othersections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc.required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims withmounting surfaces at installed locations.

2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping,equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflictsinstalled under other sections or by others.

3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potentialobstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.



1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product ofthe manufacturer.

2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution uponrequest.


this section with minimum three years documented experience.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting),NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready forinstallation.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after

installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.2.02 LUMINAIRES

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,

ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize andprotect the lamp and distribute the light.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operatingsystem.



F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without anydamage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITSA. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and

local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.B. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20

percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lampsto integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, andautomatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.

C. Battery:1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where

indicated.D. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually

activate emergency operation.E. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge.

2.04 EXIT SIGNSA. Description: Internally illuminated exit signs with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying

with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complyingwith UL 924.1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.

2.05 BALLASTS AND DRIVERSA. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting; __________: www.gelighting.com/#sle.2. OSRAM Sylvania, Inc; __________: www.osram.us/ds/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements:1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal

and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.C. Fluorescent Ballasts:

1. All Fluorescent Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide high frequency electronicballasts complying with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935.a. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation

tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent.b. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 20 percent.c. Power Factor: Not less than 0.95.d. Ballast Factor: Normal ballast factor between 0.85 and 1.15, unless otherwise

indicated.e. Thermal Protection: Listed and labeled as UL Class P, with automatic reset for

integral thermal protectors.f. Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels.g. Lamp Compatibility: Specifically designed for use with the specified lamp, with no

visible flicker.h. Lamp Operating Frequency: Greater than 20 kHz, except as specified below.i. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.7.j. Provide automatic restart capability to restart replaced lamp(s) without requiring

resetting of power.k. Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry for T5 and smaller diameter

lamp ballasts.



l. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEEC62.41.2, location category A.

m. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Complywith FCC requirements of 47 CFR 15, for Class A, non-consumer application.

n. Ballast Marking: Include wiring diagrams with lamp connections.2. Non-Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts:

a. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of 0degrees F, and energy saving lamp(s) at a minimum of 60 degrees F unlessotherwise indicated.

2.06 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITSA. Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with

indicated luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, andlisted and labeled as complying with UL 924.

B. Compatibility:1. Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy saving, and dimming AC

ballasts, including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits.2. Lamps: Compatible with low-mercury lamps.

C. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically switchesconnected lamp(s) to the fluorescent emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes ofrated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normalpower source.

D. Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicatorlight to display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergencyoperation.

2.07 LAMPSA. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting; __________: www.gelighting.com/#sle.2. Osram Sylvania; __________: www.sylvania.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.4. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, provide lamps produced by a single

manufacturer.B. Lamps - General Requirements:

1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not

specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state

lamp efficiency standards.4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish

products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that aredetermined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as requiredfor luminaire.1. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching

Procedure (TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste.2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated.3. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.4. Average Rated Life: Not less than 10,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per

start.D. Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for

luminaire.1. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching

Procedure (TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=IEEE%20C62.41.2





















































2. T8 Linear Fluorescent Lamps:a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated.b. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.c. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours

per start.2.08 ACCESSORIESPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION


properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

luminaires.E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.


3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for

installation of luminaires provided under this section.B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500

(commercial lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.F. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:

1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support

system is certified as suitable to do so.3. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four

corners.4. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional

requirements.G. Recessed Luminaires:

1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible

materials according to listing.3. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and firestopping

materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.H. Suspended Luminaires:

1. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories asrequired for specified mounting height.

2. Install canopies tight to mounting surface.3. Unless otherwise indicated, support pendants from swivel hangers.

I. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to centerof luminaire.

J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.






















































K. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.L. Emergency Lighting Units:M. Exit Signs:N. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Units:O. Install lamps in each luminaire.P. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's

recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurelydue to improper lamp burn-in.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.D. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply

units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or

replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or asdirected by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination ofegress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

C. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properlydesignate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting),

and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material andrestore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct

deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.END OF SECTION







































SECTION 26 5600EXTERIOR LIGHTING


A. Exterior luminaires.B. Ballasts.C. Lamps.D. Poles and accessories.E. Luminaire accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.D. Section 26 0919 - Enclosed Contactors: Lighting contactors.E. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including outdoor

motion sensors, time switches, and outdoor photo controls.F. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 47 CFR 15 - Radio Frequency Devices; current edition.B. AASHTO LTS - Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires

and Traffic Signals; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 6thEdition, with 2015 Interim Revisions.

C. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge andLow-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 2002.

D. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency FluorescentLamp Ballasts - Supplements; 2011.

E. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; 2012.F. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V

and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Cor 1, 2012).G. IES RP-8 - Roadway Lighting; 2014.H. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.I. NECA/IESNA 501 - Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2006.J. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic

Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2011.K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.L. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 1029 - High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.N. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs, sidewalks,trees, walls, fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by others. Coordinateelevation to obtain specified foundation height.





1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product ofthe manufacturer.

2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution uponrequest.

3. Provide structural calculations for each pole proposed for substitution.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's writteninstructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready forinstallation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 LUMINAIRESA. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,

ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize andprotect the lamp and distribute the light.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for acomplete operating system.

F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without anydamage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

G. Provide luminaires listed and labeled as suitable for wet locations unless otherwise indicated.2.03 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS

A. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements:1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal

and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.B. Fluorescent Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide high frequency electronic ballasts

complying with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935.1. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation

tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent.2. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 20 percent.3. Power Factor: Not less than 0.95.4. Ballast Factor: Normal ballast factor between 0.85 and 1.15, unless otherwise indicated.5. Thermal Protection: Listed and labeled as UL Class P, with automatic reset for integral

thermal protectors.



6. Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels.7. Lamp Compatibility: Specifically designed for use with the specified lamp, with no visible

flicker.8. Lamp Operating Frequency: Greater than 20 kHz, except as specified below.9. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.7.10. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of 0

degrees F unless otherwise indicated.11. Provide automatic restart capability to restart replaced lamp(s) without requiring resetting

of power.12. Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry for T5 and smaller diameter lamp

ballasts.13. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE

C62.41.2, location category A.14. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply with

FCC requirements of 47 CFR 15, for Class A, non-consumer application.15. Ballast Marking: Include wiring diagrams with lamp connections.

C. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electromagneticballasts complying with ANSI C82.4 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1029.1. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation

tolerance of plus or minus 5 percent.2. Power Factor: Not less than 0.90 unless otherwise indicated.3. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of -22

degrees F.2.04 LAMPS

A. Manufacturers:1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting; __________: www.gelighting.com/#sle.2. Osram Sylvania; __________: www.sylvania.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Lamps - General Requirements:1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not

specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state

lamp efficiency standards.4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish

products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that aredetermined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as requiredfor luminaire.1. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching

Procedure (TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste.2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated.3. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.4. Average Rated Life: Not less than 10,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per

start.D. Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for

luminaire.1. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching

Procedure (TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste.2. T8 Linear Fluorescent Lamps:

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated.b. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.











































c. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hoursper start.

E. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps: Wattage as indicated, with bulb type, burning position,and base type as required for luminaire.1. Metal Halide Lamps:

a. Non-Reflector Type Metal Halide Lamps: Clear lamp finish unless otherwiseindicated.

b. Provide ANSI type O-rated protected metal halide lamps where required for openluminaires provided with compatible exclusionary sockets.

2.05 POLESA. All Poles:

1. Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s) andassociated supports and accessories to be installed.

2. Structural Design Criteria:a. Comply with AASHTO LTS.b. Wind Load: Include effective projected area (EPA) of luminaire(s) and associated

supports and accessories to be installed.c. Dead Load: Include weight of proposed luminaire(s) and associated supports and

accessories.3. Material: Steel, unless otherwise indicated.4. Shape: Square straight, unless otherwise indicated.5. Finish: Match luminaire finish, unless otherwise indicated.6. Mounting: Install on concrete foundation, height as indicated on the drawings, unless

otherwise indicated.2.06 ACCESSORIESPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION


properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

luminaires.E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.


3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for

installation of luminaires provided under this section.B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501.D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.F. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center

of luminaire.G. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.





















































H. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.I. Install lamps in each luminaire.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or

replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or asdirected by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Luminaires with Field-Rotatable Optics: Position optics according to manufacturer's instructionsto achieve lighting distribution as indicated or as directed by Architect.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt,

fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correctdeficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

3.08 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION




























SECTION 27 1000STRUCTURED CABLING


A. Communications system design requirements.B. Communications pathways.C. Copper cable and terminations.D. Communications equipment room fittings.E. Communications outlets.F. Communications grounding and bonding.G. Communications identification.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit.D. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.E. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. EIA/ECA-310 - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Electronic Industries

Alliance/Electrical Components Association; Revision E, 2005.B. ICEA S-90-661 - Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With

or Without An Overall Shield) For Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications WiringSystems Technical Requirements; 2012.

C. NECA/BICSI 568 - Standard for Installing Building Telecommunications Cabling; NationalElectrical Contractors Association; 2006.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority HavingJurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

E. TIA-455-21 - FOTP-21 - Mating Durability of Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices; 2012.F. TIA-568 (SET) - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Set; 2016.G. TIA-568.2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards;

2009c, with Addendum (2016).H. TIA-569 - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; 2015d, with Addendum (2016).I. TIA-606 - Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure; 2017c.J. TIA-607 - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer

Premises; 2015c, with Addendum (2017).K. UL 444 - Communications Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 514C - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.M. UL 1863 - Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


product.



C. Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram ofnetwork layout, showing cable routings, telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layoutsand locations, service entrance, and grounding, prepared and approved by BICSI RegisteredCommunications Distribution Designer (RCDD).

D. Evidence of qualifications for installer.E. Field Test Reports.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: At least 3 years experience manufacturing products of the type

specified.B. Installer Qualifications: A company having at least 3 years experience in the installation and

testing of the type of system specified, and:1. Employing a BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).2. Supervisors and installers factory certified by manufacturers of products to be installed.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Keep stored products clean and dry.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and datacommunications, including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures,enclosures and cabinets, and outlets.1. Comply with TIA-568 (SET) (cabling) and TIA-569 (pathways) (commercial standards).2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and TIA-607 and are UL

listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified.3. Provide connection devices that are rated for operation under conditions of 32 to 140

degrees F at relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.B. Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Centrally located support structure for terminating horizontal

cables that extend to telecommunications outlets, functioning as point of presence to externalservice provider.1. Locate main distribution frame as indicated on the drawings.2. Capacity: As required to terminate all cables required by design criteria plus minimum 25

percent spare space.C. Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDF): Support structures for terminating horizontal cables

that extend to telecommunications outlets.1. Locate intermediate distribution frames as indicated on the drawings.

D. Backbone Cabling: Cabling, pathways, and terminal hardware connecting intermediatedistribution frames (IDF's) with main distribution frame (MDF), wired in star topology with maindistribution frame at center hub of star.

E. Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution framelocated at center hub of star; also referred to as "links".

2.02 PATHWAYS2.03 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONS

A. Copper Backbone Cable:1. Description: 100 ohm, balanced twisted pair cable complying with TIA-568.2, ICEA

S-90-661, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 444; arranged in 25-pair bindergroups.

2. Cable Type: TIA-568.2 Category 3 UTP (unshielded twisted pair); 24 AWG.3. Cable Capacity: Quantity of pairs as indicated on drawings.4. Cable Applications:

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=IEC%2090-661







a. Plenum Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CMP plenum cable.b. Riser Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CMR riser cable or Type CMP plenum

cable.B. Copper Horizontal Cable:

1. Description: 100 ohm, balanced twisted pair cable complying with TIA-568.2 and listedand labeled as complying with UL 444.

2. Cable Type - Voice and Data: TIA-568.2 Category 6 UTP (unshielded twisted pair); 23AWG.

3. Cable Capacity: 4-pair.4. Cable Applications:

a. Plenum Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CMP plenum cable.b. Riser Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CMR riser cable or Type CMP plenum

cable.c. General Purpose Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CM/CMG general purpose

cable, Type CMR riser cable, or Type CMP plenum cable.5. Cable Jacket Color - Voice and Data Cable: Blue.

C. Copper Cable Terminations: Insulation displacement connection (IDC) type using appropriatetool; use screw connections only where specifically indicated.

D. Jacks and Connectors: Modular RJ-45, non-keyed, terminated with 110-style insulationdisplacement connectors (IDC); high impact thermoplastic housing; suitable for and complyingwith same standard as specified horizontal cable; UL 1863 listed.1. Performance: 500 mating cycles.2. Voice and Data Jacks: 8-position modular jack, color-coded for both T568A and T568B

wiring configurations.2.04 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

A. Copper Cross-Connection Equipment:1. Connector Blocks for Category 5e and Up Cabling: Type 110 insulation displacement

connectors; capacity sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.2. Patch Panels for Copper Cabling: Sized to fit EIA/ECA-310 standard 19 inch wide

equipment racks; 0.09 inch thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type 110 insulationdisplacement connectors; printed circuit board interface.a. Jacks: Non-keyed RJ-45, suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to

be terminated; maximum 48 ports per standard width panel.b. Capacity: Provide ports sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.c. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered

consecutively; comply with TIA-606.d. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.

2.05 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETSA. Outlet Boxes: Comply with Section 26 0533.16.

1. Provide depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimumconductor bend radius.

B. Wall Plates:1. Comply with system design standards and UL 514C.2. Accepts modular jacks/inserts.

2.06 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTSA. Comply with TIA-607.

2.07 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTSA. Comply with TIA-606.






















































PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA-568 (SET) (cabling), TIA-569 (pathways),TIA-607 (grounding and bonding), NECA/BICSI 568, NFPA 70, and SYSTEM DESIGN asspecified in PART 2.

B. Comply with Communication Service Provider requirements.C. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with TIA-607 and NFPA 70.D. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.3.02 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Install pathways with the following minimum clearances:1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment,

and uninterruptible power systems.2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures.4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.

B. Conduit, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0533.13:1. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of two 90 degree bend(s) between

pull points.C. Outlet Boxes:

1. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required forinstallation of telecommunications outlets provided under this section.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLINGA. Cabling:

1. Do not bend cable at radius less than manufacturer's recommended bend radius; forunshielded twisted pair use bend radius of not less than 4 times cable diameter.

2. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.3. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.4. When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not

chafe or damage outer jacket.B. Service Loops (Slack or Excess Length): Provide the following minimum extra length of cable,

looped neatly:1. At Distribution Frames: 120 inches.2. At Outlets - Copper: 12 inches.

C. Copper Cabling:1. Category 5e and Above: Maintain cable geometry; do not untwist more than 1/2 inch from

point of termination.2. For 4-pair cables in conduit, do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension.3. Use T568B wiring configuration.

D. Wall-Mounted Racks and Enclosures:1. Install to plywood backboards only, unless otherwise indicated.2. Mount so height of topmost panel does not exceed 78 inches above floor.

E. Identification:1. Use wire and cable markers to identify cables at each end.2. Use manufacturer-furnished label inserts, identification labels, or engraved wallplate to

identify each jack at communications outlets with unique identifier.3. Use identification nameplate to identify cross-connection equipment, equipment racks, and

cabinets.







http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=TIA-607















































3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Comply with inspection and testing requirements of specified installation standards.C. Visual Inspection:

1. Inspect cable jackets for certification markings.2. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels of proper type.3. Inspect outlet plates and patch panels for complete labels.

D. Testing - Copper Cabling and Associated Equipment:1. Test backbone cables after termination but before cross-connection.2. Test backbone cables for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and

polarity between connectors and between conductors and shield, if cable has overallshield.

3. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks.4. Category 3 Backbone: Perform attenuation test.5. Category 3 Links: Test each pair for short circuit continuity, short to ground, crosses,

reversed polarity, operational and ring-back, and dial tone.E. Final Testing: After all work is complete, including installation of telecommunications outlets,

and telephone dial tone service is active, test each voice jack for dial tone.END OF SECTION

























SECTION 27 5223NURSE CALL/CODE BLUE SYSTEMS


A. Nurse call master station.B. Central control and power supply equipment.C. Call stations.D. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements; cable routing;

connection diagrams; and equipment arrangement.C. Product Data: Provide showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements.


this section with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities within 100miles of Project.

C. Supplier Qualifications: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum threeyears documented experience.



A. TekTone Sound & Signal Manufacturing, Inc; ______: www.tektone.net/#sle.B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 NURSE CALL/CODE BLUE SYSTEMA. System Features:

1. Two-way communication between master station and patient, emergency, staff, and dutystations.

2. Digital page system.3. Audible and visual annunciation of calls to master station.

B. System Capacity:C. System Configuration:D. Calling Sequence of Operation:E. Annunciation Sequence of Operation:F. Call Status Annunciation:G. Intercom Sequence of Operation:



2.03 MASTER STATIONA. Description: Desk-mounted master nurse call unit.B. Speaker Sensitivity: 92 dB/watt input.C. Handset: Standard molded plastic telephone handset with 4 feet long permanently coiled cord.D. Controls and Indicators: Mark each control and indicator with legible and permanent plastic

nameplates. Provide the following minimum controls and indicators:1. Ten digit, silent operating touch key pad.2. Lighted annunciator integral with each selector switch for each call station. Use lamps

replaceable from front of unit.3. Digital display units.4. Audible tone signal for incoming calls.5. SYSTEM BUSY indicator lamp.6. STATUS SCAN switch to indicate medical status of each call station.7. REMINDER switch to set reminder status for each call station.8. Speaker disconnect by lifting handset.9. INTERCOM/MONITOR speaker switch.

2.04 SYSTEM CONTROL UNITA. Description: Surface wall-mounted intercom control unit.B. Intercom Amplifier: 15 watts rated output with less than 5 percent total harmonic distortion,

frequency response of 100 to 10,000 Hz plus or minus 3 dB, and minimum 60 dBsignal-to-noise ratio at rated output.

C. Input and Output Lines: Use balanced transformers.D. Provide terminal blocks for external wiring connections.E. Controls and Indicators: Provide the following, minimum:

1. Handset transmitter volume control.2. Handset receiver volume control.3. Master listen volume control.4. Master talk volume control.

2.05 SYSTEM POWER SUPPLYA. Description: Surface wall-mounted power supply unit.B. Input Rating: 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase. Provide input fuse.C. Output Ratings: Provide output power at voltage, regulation, and noise level to meet

requirements of nurse system switching and control unit. Limit output during overload or shortcircuit conditions to less than 100 volt-amperes, with automatic restoration to normal operationafter overload or short circuit conditions are cleared.

D. Standby Operation: Provide integral batteries and battery charger to provide uninterruptedoperation of nurse call system for a minimum of 6 minutes during an input power outage.

E. Provide output contacts for remote power supply monitor and alarm.F. Provide terminal blocks for external wiring connections.

2.06 CALL STATIONSA. Patient Call Station: Recessed wall-mounted call station.

1. Integral speaker/microphone.2. Call cord receptacle. Provide two receptacles for two-bed patient station.3. CANCEL switch.4. CALL ASSURANCE light indicating station call. Provide two lights for two-bed patient

station.5. PRIVACY switch to disable microphone function of speaker.



6. System Monitor: Key-operated switch to enable patient station to function as systemmonitor.

7. Staff-Assist Switch: Integral pushbutton switch with engraved legend PUSH FOR HELP.B. Emergency Station: Recessed wall-mounted call station, suitable for use in wet locations, and

with the following features:1. Pull Cord Actuated Station: Enclosed switch with six foot nylon cord, held by breakaway

chain.2. Push Actuated Station: Red pushbutton pad with engraved legend PUSH FOR HELP.3. CANCEL switch.4. CALL ASSURANCE light to indicate station call.

C. Staff Station: Recessed wall mounted call station, with the following features:1. Integral speaker/microphone.2. CALL switch.3. CANCEL switch.4. CALL ASSURANCE light indicating station call.

2.07 ACCESSORIESA. Corridor Light: Wall or ceiling mounted indicating light units, with the following features:

1. Single lamp units: Red lens.B. Call Cord: Pushbutton switch in plastic housing, molded to six foot cord with plug to fit patient

station receptacle. Provide non-removable stainless steel sheet clamp.2.08 NURSE CALL SYSTEM CABLE

A. Home Run Cable: Twisted, shielded pair, 20 AWG.B. Master Station Interconnect Cable: Eleven twisted, shielded pairs, 22 AWG.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Perform operational test on each item of equipment and on system.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust controls to achieve proper operation.B. Set medical status of each patient and staff station as directed.

3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. Demonstrate system operation to designated Owner personnel.B. Conduct walking tour of project and briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of

each component.END OF SECTION



SECTION 31 3116TERMITE CONTROL


A. Chemical soil treatment.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Vapor barrier placement under concreteslab-on-grade.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide

Act; 1947 (Revised 2001).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule,

intended application rate.C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that toxicants meet or exceed specified requirements.D. Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and:

1. Approved by manufacturer of treatment materials.2. Licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

1.06 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year installer's warranty against damage to building caused by termites.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CHEMICAL SOIL TREATMENT

A. Toxicant Chemical: EPA (Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y) approved;synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil.

B. Mixes: Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify final grading is complete.3.02 APPLICATION - CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Comply with requirements of U.S. EPA and applicable state and local codes.B. Spray apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Apply toxicant at following locations:

1. Under Slabs-on-Grade.2. At Both Sides of Foundation Surface.

D. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.END OF SECTION

STAFFORD SKILLED NURSING FACILITY PROCUREMENT AND...

Documents

Transcript of STAFFORD SKILLED NURSING FACILITY PROCUREMENT AND...